ADUC848BS8-5 [ADI]

MicroConverter Multichannel 24-/16-Bit ADCs with Embedded 62 kB Flash and Single-Cycle MCU; 微转换器多通道24位/ 16位ADC,内置62 KB的闪存和单周期MCU
ADUC848BS8-5
型号: ADUC848BS8-5
厂家: ADI    ADI
描述:

MicroConverter Multichannel 24-/16-Bit ADCs with Embedded 62 kB Flash and Single-Cycle MCU
微转换器多通道24位/ 16位ADC,内置62 KB的闪存和单周期MCU

转换器 闪存
文件: 总108页 (文件大小:1108K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
MicroConverter® Multichannel  
24-/16-Bit ADCs with Embedded 62 kB  
Flash and Single-Cycle MCU  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Power  
FEATURES  
High resolution Σ-∆ ADCs  
Normal: 4.8 mA max @ 3.6 V (core CLK = 1.57 MHz)  
Power-down: 20 µA max with wake-up timer running  
Specified for 3 V and 5 V operation  
Two independent 24-bit ADCs on the ADuC845  
Single 24-bit ADC on the ADuC847 and  
single 16-bit ADC on the ADuC848  
Package and temperature range:  
Up to 10 ADC input channels on all parts  
24-bit no missing codes  
52-lead MQFP (14 mm × 14 mm), −40°C to +125°C  
56-lead CSP (8 mm × 8 mm), −40°C to +85°C  
22-bit rms (19.5 bit p-p) effective resolution  
Offset drift 10 nV/°C, gain drift 0.5 ppm/°C chop enabled  
APPLICATIONS  
Multichannel sensor monitoring  
Memory  
Industrial/environmental instrumentation  
Weigh scales, pressure sensors, temperature monitoring  
Portable instrumentation, battery-powered systems  
Data logging, precision system monitoring  
62-kbyte on-chip Flash/EE program memory  
4-kbyte on-chip Flash/EE data memory  
Flash/EE, 100 year retention, 100 kcycle endurance  
3 levels of Flash/EE program memory security  
In-circuit serial download (no external hardware)  
High speed user download (5 seconds)  
2304 bytes on-chip data RAM  
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
AVDD  
ADuC845  
AVCO  
IEXC1  
IEXC2  
CURRENT  
SOURCE  
8051-based core  
AIN0  
8051-compatible instruction set  
High performance single-cycle core  
32 kHz external crystal  
PRIMARY  
24-BIT Σ-ADC  
BUF  
PGA  
12-BIT  
DAC  
DAC  
BUF  
MUX  
AGND  
On-chip programmable PLL (12.58 MHz max)  
3 × 16-bit timer/counter  
AIN9  
DUAL 16-BIT  
Σ-DAC  
PWM0  
PWM1  
AUXILIARY  
24-BIT Σ-ADC  
AINCOM  
MUX  
TEMP  
SENSOR  
DUAL 16-BIT  
PWM  
24 programmable I/O lines, plus 8 analog or  
digital input lines  
REFIN2+  
REFIN2–  
11 interrupt sources, two priority levels  
Dual data pointer, extended 11-bit stack pointer  
REFIN–  
REFIN+  
EXTERNAL  
VREF  
DETECT  
INTERNAL  
BAND GAP  
VREF  
SINGLE-CYCLE 8061 BASED MCU  
RESET  
DVDD  
62 kBYTES FLASH/EE PROGRAM MEMORY  
4 kBYTES FLASH/EE DATA MEMORY  
2304 BYTES USER RAM  
POR  
On-chip peripherals  
Internal power-on reset circuit  
12-bit voltage output DAC  
DGND  
PLL AND PRG  
CLOCK DIV  
3 × 16 BIT TIMERS  
BAUD RATE TIMER  
POWER SUPPLY MON  
WATCHDOG TIMER  
WAKE-UP/  
RTC TIMER  
UART, SPI, AND I 2  
SERIAL I/O  
C
4 × PARALLEL  
PORTS  
OSC  
Dual 16-bit Σ-∆ DACs  
On-chip temperature sensor (ADuC845 only)  
Dual excitation current sources (200 µA)  
Time interval counter (wake-up/RTC timer)  
UART, SPI®, and I2C® serial I/O  
XTAL1 XTAL2  
Figure 1. ADuC845 Functional Block Diagram  
High speed dedicated baud rate generator (incl 115,200)  
Watchdog timer (WDT)  
Power supply monitor (PSM)  
Rev. A  
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable.  
However, no responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any  
infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use.  
Specifications subject to change without notice. No license is granted by implication  
or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.  
Tel: 781.329.4700  
Fax: 781.326.8703  
www.analog.com  
© 2004 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Specifications..................................................................................... 4  
ADC SFR Interface..................................................................... 39  
ADCSTAT (ADC Status Register) ........................................... 40  
ADCMODE (ADC Mode Register)......................................... 41  
ADC0CON1 (Primary ADC Control Register)..................... 43  
ADC0CON2 (Primary ADC Channel Select Register) ........ 44  
SF (ADC Sinc Filter Control Register).................................... 46  
ICON (Excitation Current Sources Control Register).......... 47  
Nonvolatile Flash/EE Memory Overview............................... 48  
Flash/EE Program Memory...................................................... 49  
User Download Mode (ULOAD)............................................. 50  
Using Flash/EE Data Memory.................................................. 51  
Flash/EE Memory Timing ........................................................ 52  
DAC Circuit Information.......................................................... 53  
Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM).............................................. 55  
On-Chip PLL (PLLCON).......................................................... 60  
I2C Serial Interface ..................................................................... 61  
SPI Serial Interface..................................................................... 64  
Using the SPI Interface .............................................................. 66  
Dual Data Pointers..................................................................... 67  
Power Supply Monitor............................................................... 68  
Watchdog Timer......................................................................... 69  
Time Interval Counter (TIC).................................................... 70  
8052 Compatible On-Chip Peripherals................................... 73  
Timers/Counters ........................................................................ 75  
UART Serial Interface................................................................ 80  
Interrupt System......................................................................... 85  
Interrupt Priority........................................................................ 86  
Interrupt Vectors ........................................................................ 86  
Hardware Design Considerations ................................................ 87  
External Memory Interface....................................................... 87  
Power Supplies............................................................................ 87  
Abosolute Maximum Ratings ....................................................... 10  
ESD Caution................................................................................ 10  
Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions........................... 11  
General Description....................................................................... 15  
8052 Instruction Set ................................................................... 18  
Timer Operation......................................................................... 18  
ALE............................................................................................... 18  
External Memory Access........................................................... 18  
Complete SFR Map .................................................................... 19  
Functional Description.................................................................. 20  
8051 Instruction Set ................................................................... 20  
Memory Organization ............................................................... 22  
Special Function Registers (SFRs)............................................ 24  
ADC Circuit Information.......................................................... 26  
Auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 Only) ............................................ 32  
Reference Inputs ......................................................................... 32  
Burnout Current Sources .......................................................... 32  
Reference Detect Circuit ........................................................... 33  
Sinc Filter Register (SF) ............................................................. 33  
Σ-Modulator............................................................................ 33  
Digital Filter ................................................................................ 33  
ADC Chopping........................................................................... 34  
Calibration................................................................................... 34  
Programmable Gain Amplifier................................................. 35  
Bipolar/Unipolar Configuration .............................................. 35  
Data Output Coding .................................................................. 36  
Excitation Currents .................................................................... 36  
ADC Power-On .......................................................................... 36  
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 37  
Functional Description.................................................................. 39  
Rev. A | Page 2 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Power-On Reset Operation........................................................88  
Power Consumption...................................................................88  
Power-Saving Modes ..................................................................88  
Grounding and Board Layout Recommendations .................89  
Other Hardware Considerations...............................................90  
QuickStart Development System ..................................................94  
QuickStart-PLUS Development System ..................................94  
Timing Specifications .....................................................................95  
Outline Dimensions......................................................................104  
Ordering Guide .........................................................................105  
REVISION HISTORY  
6/04—Changed from Rev. 0 to Rev. A  
Changes to Figure 5.........................................................................17  
Changes to Figure 6.........................................................................18  
Changes to Figure 7.........................................................................19  
Changes to Table 5 ..........................................................................24  
Changes to Table 24 ........................................................................41  
Changes to Table 25 ........................................................................43  
Changes to Table 26 ........................................................................44  
Changes to Table 27 ........................................................................45  
Changes to User Download Mode Section..................................50  
Added Figure 51 and Renumbered Subsequent Figures............50  
Edits to the DACH/DACL Data Registers Section .....................53  
Changes to Table 34 ........................................................................56  
Added SPIDAT: SPI Data Register Section..................................65  
Changes to Table 42 ........................................................................67  
Changes to Table 43 ........................................................................68  
Changes to Table 44 ........................................................................69  
Changes to Table 45 ........................................................................71  
Changes to Table 50 ........................................................................75  
Changes to Timer/Counter 0 and 1 Data Registers Section......76  
Changes to Table 54 ........................................................................80  
Added the SBUF—UART Serial Port Data Register Section.....80  
Addition to the Timer 3 Generated Baud Rates Section............83  
Added Table 57 and Renumbered Subsequent Tables................84  
Changes to Table 61 ........................................................................86  
4/04—Revision 0: Initial Version  
Rev. A | Page 3 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
SPECIFICATIONS1  
AVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V or 4.75 V to 5.25 V, DVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V or 4.75 V to 5.25 V, REFIN(+) = 2.5 V, REFIN(–) = AGND; AGND =  
DGND = 0 V; XTAL1/XTAL2 = 32.768 kHz crystal; all specifications TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted. Input buffer on for primary  
ADC, unless otherwise noted. Core speed = 1.57 MHz (default CD = 3), unless otherwise noted.  
Table 1.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
PRIMARY ADC  
Conversion Rate  
5.4  
105  
Hz  
Chop on (ADCMODE.3 = 0)  
16.06  
24  
24  
1365  
Hz  
Bits  
Bits  
Chop off (ADCMODE.3 = 1)  
≤26.7 Hz update rate with chop enabled  
≤80.3 Hz update rate with chop disabled  
No Missing Codes2  
Resolution (ADuC845/ADuC847)  
Resolution (ADuC848)  
See Table 11 and Table 15  
See Table 13 and Table 17  
Output Noise (ADuC845/ADuC847) See Table 10 and Table 14  
µV (rms)  
µV (rms)  
Output noise varies with selected update rates,  
gain range, and chop status.  
Output noise varies with selected update rates,  
gain range and chop status.  
Output Noise (ADuC848)  
See Table 12 and Table 16  
3
Integral Nonlinearity  
Offset Error3  
15  
ppm of FSR 1 LSB16  
µV  
Chop on  
Chop off, offset error is in the order of the noise  
for the programmed gain and update rate  
following a calibration.  
Chop on (ADCMODE.3 = 0)  
Chop off (ADCMODE.3 = 1)  
Offset Error Drift vs. Temperature2  
10  
200  
nV/°C  
nV/°C  
Full-Scale Error4  
ADuC845/ADuC847  
ADuC848  
10  
10  
0.5  
0.5  
µV  
µV  
LSB16  
ppm/°C  
20 mV to 2.56 V  
20 mV to 640 mV  
1.28 V to 2.56 V  
Gain Error Drift vs. Temperature4  
Power Supply Rejection  
80  
dB  
dB  
dB  
AIN = 1 V, 2.56 V, chop enabled  
AIN = 7.8 mV, 20 mV, chop enabled  
AIN = 1 V, 2.56 V, chop disabled2  
113  
80  
PRIMARY ADC ANALOG INPUTS  
Differential Input Voltage Ranges5, 6  
Bipolar Mode (ADC0CON1.5 = 0)  
Gain = 1 to 128  
VREF = REFIN(+) − REFIN(−) or  
1.024 ꢀ  
V
VREF/GAIN  
0 – 1.024 ꢀ  
VREF/GAIN  
REFIN2(+) − REFIN2(−) (or Int 1.25 VREF  
VREF = REFIN(+) − REFIN(−) or  
REFIN2(+) − REFIN2(−) (or Int 1.25 VREF  
)
)
Unipolar Mode (ADC0CON1.5 = 1)  
V
ADC Range Matching  
Common-Mode Rejection DC  
On AIN  
2
µV  
AIN = 18 mV, chop enabled  
Chop enabled, chop disabled  
AIN = 7.8 mV, range = 20 mV  
AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V  
95  
dB  
dB  
113  
Common-Mode Rejection  
50 Hz/60 Hz2  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, 16.6 Hz and 50 Hz update  
rate, chop enabled, REJ60 enabled  
On AIN  
95  
90  
dB  
dB  
AIN = 7.8 mV, range = 20 mV  
AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 4 of 108  
 
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Parameter  
Normal Mode Rejection 50 Hz/60 Hz2  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
On AIN  
75  
dB  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, 16.6 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H,  
chop on, REJ60 on  
100  
67  
dB  
dB  
50 Hz 1 Hz, 16.6 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H, chop on  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, 50 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H,  
chop off, REJ60 on  
100  
dB  
nA  
nA  
50 Hz 1 Hz, 50 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H, chop off  
TMAX = 85°C, buffer on  
TMAX = 125°C, buffer on  
Analog Input Current2  
1
5
Analog Input Current Drift  
5
15  
125  
2
pA/°C  
pA/°C  
nA/V  
pA/V/°C  
V
TMAX = 85°C, buffer on  
TMAX = 125°C, buffer on  
2.56 V range, buffer bypassed  
Buffer bypassed  
AIN1…AIN10 and AINCOM with buffer enabled  
Average Input Current  
Average Input Current Drift  
Absolute AIN Voltage Limits2  
AGND  
0.1  
AGND  
0.03  
+
AVDD  
0.1  
AVDD  
0.03  
+
Absolute AIN Voltage Limits2  
V
AIN1…AIN10 and AINCOM with buffer bypassed  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUTS  
REFIN(+) to REFIN(–) Voltage  
REFIN(+) to REFIN(–) Range2  
Average Reference Input Current  
Average Reference Input Current  
Drift  
2.5  
1
V
V
µA/V  
REFIN refers to both REFIN and REFIN2  
REFIN refers to both REFIN and REFIN2  
Both ADCs enabled  
1
AVDD  
0.65  
0.1  
nA/V/°C  
V
NOXREF Trigger Voltage  
0.3  
NOXREF (ADCSTAT.4) bit active if VREF > 0.3 V, and  
inactive if VREF > 0.65 V  
Common-Mode Rejection  
DC Rejection  
125  
dB  
dB  
AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, AIN = 1 V,  
range = 2.56 V, SF = 82  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V,  
SF = 52H, chop on, REJ60 on  
50 Hz 1 Hz, AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V,  
SF = 52H, chop on  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V,  
SF = 52H, chop off, REJ60 on  
50 Hz 1 Hz, AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V,  
SF = 52H, chop off  
50 Hz/60 Hz Rejection2  
90  
Normal Mode Rejection 50 Hz/60 Hz2  
75  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
100  
67  
100  
AUXILIARY ADC (ADuC845 Only)  
Conversion Rate  
5.4  
105  
Hz  
Chop on  
16.06  
24  
24  
1365  
Hz  
Bits  
Bits  
Chop off  
No Missing Codes2  
≤26.7 Hz update rate, chop enabled  
80.3 Hz update rate, chop disabled  
Resolution  
See Table 19 and Table 21  
See Table 18 and Table 20  
Output Noise  
Integral Nonlinearity  
Offset Error3  
Output noise varies with selected update rates.  
15  
ppm of FSR 1 LSB16  
3
µV  
Chop on  
Chop off  
Chop on  
Chop off  
0.25  
10  
LSB16  
nV/°C  
nV/°C  
LSB16  
ppm/°C  
dB  
Offset Error Drift2  
200  
0.5  
0.5  
Full-Scale Error4  
Gain Error Drift4  
Power Supply Rejection  
80  
AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V, chop enabled  
AIN = 1 V, range = 2.56 V, chop disabled  
80  
dB  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 5 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
AUXILIARY ADC ANALOG INPUTS  
(ADuC845 Only)  
Differential Input Voltage Ranges5, 6  
Bipolar Mode (ADC1CON.5 = 0)  
Unipolar Mode (ADC1CON.5 = 1)  
Average Analog Input Current  
Analog Input Current Drift  
VREF  
V
V
REFIN = REFIN(+) − REFIN(−) (or Int 1.25 VREF  
REFIN = REFIN(+) − REFIN(−) (or Int 1.25 VREF  
)
)
0 – VREF  
125  
2
nA/V  
pA/V/°C  
V
Absolute AIN/AINCOM Voltage  
AGND  
0.03  
AVDD  
0.03  
+
Limits2, 7  
Normal Mode Rejection 50 Hz/60 Hz2  
On AIN and REFIN  
75  
dB  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, 16.6 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H,  
chop on, REJ60 on  
100  
67  
dB  
dB  
50 Hz 1 Hz, 16.6 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H, chop on  
50 Hz/60 Hz 1 Hz, 50 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H,  
chop off, REJ60 on  
100  
dB  
50 Hz 1 Hz, 50 Hz Fadc, SF = 52H, chop off  
ADC SYSTEM CALIBRATION  
Full-Scale Calibration Limit  
Zero-Scale Calibration Limit  
Input Span  
+1.05 ꢀ FS  
2.1 ꢀ FS  
V
V
V
−1.05 ꢀ FS  
0.8 ꢀ FS  
DAC  
Voltage Range  
0 – VREF  
0 – AVDD  
10  
100  
0.5  
V
V
kΩ  
pF  
DACCON.2 = 0  
DACCON.2 = 1  
From DAC output to AGND  
From DAC output to AGND  
Resistive Load  
Capactive Load  
Output Impedance  
ISINK  
50  
µA  
DC Specifications8  
Resolution  
12  
Bits  
LSB  
LSB  
mV  
%
Relative Accuracy  
Differential Non Linearity  
Offset Error  
3
−1  
50  
1
Guaranteed 12-bit monotonic  
Gain Error  
AVDD range  
VREF range  
1
%
AC Specifications2, 8  
Voltage Output Settling Time  
Digital-to-Analog Glitch Energy  
INTERNAL REFERENCE  
ADC Reference  
15  
10  
µs  
nVs  
Settling time to 1 LSB of final value  
1 LSB change at major carry  
Chop enabled  
1.25 − 1%  
2.5 – 1%  
Reference Voltage  
Power Supply Rejection  
Reference Tempco  
DAC Reference  
Reference Voltage  
1.25  
45  
100  
1.25 + 1%  
2.5 + 1%  
V
dB  
ppm/°C  
Initial tolerance @ 25°C, VDD = 5 V  
2.5  
50  
100  
1% V  
dB  
ppm/°C  
Initial tolerance @ 25°C, VDD = 5 V  
Power Supply Rejection  
Reference Tempco  
TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
(ADuC845 Only)  
Accuracy  
Thermal Impedance  
2
90  
52  
°C  
°C/W  
°C/W  
MQFP package  
CSP package  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 6 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
TRANSDUCER BURNOUT CURRENT  
SOURCES  
AIN+ Current  
−100  
100  
nA  
nA  
AIN+ is the selected positive input (AIN4 or AIN6  
only) to the primary ADC  
AIN− is the selected negative input (AIN5 or AIN7  
only) to the primary ADC  
AIN− Current  
Initial Tolerance at 25°C  
Drift  
10  
0.03  
%
%/°C  
EXCITATION CURRENT SOURCES  
Output Current  
Initial Tolerance at 25°C  
Drift  
Initial Current Matching at 25°C  
Drift Matching  
200  
10  
200  
1
20  
1
µA  
%
Available from each current source  
ppm/°C  
%
ppm/°C  
µA/V  
µA/V  
V
Matching between both current sources  
AVDD = 5 V 5%  
Line Regulation (AVDD  
)
Load Regulation  
Output Compliance2  
0.1  
AVDD − 0.6  
AGND  
2.63  
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR (PSM)  
AVDD Trip Point Selection Range  
AVDD Trip Point Accuracy  
4.63  
3.0  
4.0  
4.63  
3.0  
4.0  
V
Four trip points selectable in this range  
TMAX = 85°C  
TMAX = 125°C  
Four trip points selectable in this range  
TMAX = 85°C  
TMAX = 125°C  
%
%
V
%
%
DVDD Trip Point Selection Range  
DVDD Trip Point Accuracy  
2.63  
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR  
(XTAL1 AND XTAL2)  
Logic Inputs, XTAL1 Only2  
VINL, Input Low Voltage  
0.8  
0.4  
V
V
V
V
DVDD = 5 V  
DVDD = 3 V  
DVDD = 5 V  
DVDD = 3 V  
VINH, Input Low Voltage  
3.5  
2.5  
XTAL1 Input Capacitance  
XTAL2 Output Capacitance  
LOGIC INPUTS  
18  
18  
pF  
pF  
All inputs except SCLOCK, RESET,  
and XTAL12  
VINL, Input Low Voltage  
0.8  
0.4  
V
V
V
DVDD = 5 V  
DVDD = 3 V  
VINH, Input Low Voltage  
2.0  
SCLOCK and RESET Only  
(Schmidt Triggered Inputs)2  
VT+  
1.3  
0.95  
0.8  
0.4  
0.3  
3.0  
2.5  
1.4  
1.1  
0.85  
V
V
V
V
V
DVDD = 5 V  
DVDD = 3 V  
DVDD = 5 V  
DVDD = 3 V  
VT−  
VT+ − VT−  
DVDD = 5 V or 3 V  
Input Currents  
Port 0, P1.0 to P1.7, EA  
RESET  
10  
10  
105  
10  
−660  
−75  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
pF  
VIN = 0 V or VDD  
VIN = 0 V, DVDD = 5 V  
35  
VIN = DVDD, DVDD = 5 V, internal pull-down  
VIN = DVDD, DVDD = 5 V  
VIN = 2 V, DVDD = 5 V  
VIN = 0.45 V, DVDD = 5 V  
All digital inputs  
Port 2, Port 3  
−180  
−20  
Input Capacitance  
10  
Rev. A | Page 7 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
LOGIC OUTPUTS  
(All Digital Outputs except XTAL2)  
VOH, Output High Voltage2  
2.4  
2.4  
V
V
V
V
µA  
pF  
DVDD = 5 V, ISOURCE = 80 µA  
DVDD = 3 V, ISOURCE = 20 µA  
ISINK = 8 mA, SCLOCK, SDATA  
ISINK = 1.6 mA on P0, P1, P2  
VOL, Output Low Voltage  
0.4  
0.4  
10  
Floating State Leakage Current2  
Floating State Output Capacitance  
START-UP TIME  
10  
At Power-On  
600  
3
2
ms  
ms  
ms  
After Ext RESET in Normal Mode  
After WDT RESET in Normal Mode  
From Power-Down Mode  
Oscillator Running  
Controlled via WDCON SFR  
PLLCON.7 = 0  
Wake-Up with INT0 Interrupt  
Wake-Up with SPI Interrupt  
Wake-Up with TIC Interrupt  
Oscillator Powered Down  
Wake-Up with INT0 Interrupt  
20  
20  
20  
µs  
µs  
µs  
PLLCON.7 = 1  
30  
30  
µs  
µs  
Wake-Up with SPI Interrupt  
FLASH/EE MEMORY RELIABILITY  
CHARACTERISTICS  
Endurance9  
Data Retention10  
100,000  
100  
Cycles  
Years  
POWER REQUIREMENTS  
Power Supply Voltages  
AVDD 3 V Nominal  
AVDD 5 V Nominal  
DVDD 3 V Nominal  
DVDD 5 V Nominal  
5 V Power Consumption  
Normal Mode11, 12  
DVDD Current  
2.7  
4.75  
2.7  
3.6  
5.25  
3.6  
V
V
V
V
4.75  
5.25  
4.75 V < DVDD < 5.25 V, AVDD = 5.25 V  
10  
31  
180  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Core clock = 1.57 MHz  
Core clock = 12.58 MHz  
25  
AVDD Current  
Power-Down Mode11, 12  
DVDD Current  
40  
50  
20  
30  
53  
33  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
TMAX = 85°C; OSC on; TIC on  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC on; TIC on  
TMAX = 85°C; OSC off  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC off  
AVDD Current  
1
3
TMAX = 85°C; OSC on or off  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC on or off  
5 V VDD, CD = 3  
Typical Additional Peripheral  
Currents (AIDD and DIDD  
)
Primary ADC  
1
mA  
mA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
Auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 Only)  
Power Supply Monitor  
DAC  
0.5  
30  
60  
200  
DACH/L = 000H  
200 µA each. Can be combined to give 400 µA on  
a single output.  
Dual Excitation Current Sources  
ALE Off  
WDT  
−20  
10  
µA  
µA  
PCON.4 = 1 (see Table 6)  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 8 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
PWM  
−Fxtal  
−Fvco  
TIC  
3
0.5  
1
µA  
mA  
µA  
3 V Power Consumption  
Normal Mode11, 12  
DVDD Current  
2.7 V < DVDD < 3.6 V, AVDD = 3.6 V  
4.8  
11  
180  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Core clock = 1.57 MHz  
Core clock = 6.29 MHz (CD = 1)  
ADC not enabled  
9
AVDD Current  
Power-Down Mode11, 12  
DVDD Current  
20  
29  
14  
21  
26  
20  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
TMAX = 85°C; OSC on; TIC on  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC on; TIC on  
Tmax = 85°C; OSC off  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC off  
TMAX = 85°C; OSC on or off  
TMAX = 125°C; OSC on or off  
AVDD Current  
1
3
1 Temperature range is for ADuC845BS; for the ADuC847BS and ADuC848BS (MQFP package), the range is –40°C to +125°C.  
Temperature range for ADuC845BCP, ADuC847BCP, and ADuC848BCP (CSP package) is –40°C to +85°C.  
2 These numbers are not production tested but are guaranteed by design and/or characterization data on production release.  
3 System zero-scale calibration can remove this error.  
4 Gain error drift is a span drift. To calculate full-scale error drift, add the offset error drift to the gain error drift times the full-scale input.  
5 In general terms, the bipolar input voltage range to the primary ADC is given by the ADC range = (VREF 2RN )/1.25, where:  
VREF = REFIN(+) to REFIN(–) voltage and VREF = 1.25 V when internal ADC VREF is selected. RN = decimal equivalent of RN2, RN1, RN0. For example, if VREF = 2.5 V and RN2,  
RN1, RN0 = 1, 1, 0, respectively, then the ADC range = 1.28 V. In unipolar mode, the effective range is 0 V to 1.28 V in this example.  
6 1.25 V is used as the reference voltage to the ADC when internal VREF is selected via XREF0/XREF1 or AXREF bits in ADC0CON2 and ADC1CON, respectively.  
(AXREF is available only on the ADuC845.)  
7 In bipolar mode, the auxiliary ADC can be driven only to a minimum of AGND – 30 mV as indicated by the auxiliary ADC absolute AIN voltage limits. The bipolar range is  
still –VREF to +VREF  
.
8 DAC linearity and ac specifications are calculated using a reduced code range of 48 to 4095, 0 V to VREF, reduced code range of 100 to 3950, 0 V to VDD.  
9 Endurance is qualified to 100 kcycle per JEDEC Std. 22 method A117 and measured at –40°C, +25°C, +85°C, and +125°C. Typical endurance at 25°C is 700 kcycles.  
10 Retention lifetime equivalent at junction temperature (TJ) = 55°C per JEDEC Std. 22, Method A117. Retention lifetime based on an activation energy of 0.6 eV derates  
with junction temperature.  
11 Power supply current consumption is measured in normal mode following the power-on sequence, and in power-down modes under the following conditions:  
Normal mode: reset = 0.4 V, digital I/O pins = open circuit, Core Clk changed via CD bits in PLLCON, core executing internal software loop.  
Power-down mode: reset = 0.4 V, all P0 pins and P1.2 to P1.7 pins = 0.4 V. All other digital I/O pins are open circuit, core Clk changed via CD bits in PLLCON, PCON.1 = 1,  
core execution suspended in power-down mode, OSC turned on or off via OSC_PD bit (PLLCON.7) in PLLCON SFR.  
12 DVDD power supply current increases typically by 3 mA (3 V operation) and 10 mA (5 V operation) during a Flash/EE memory program or erase cycle.  
General Notes about Specifications  
DAC gain error is a measure of the span error of the DAC.  
The ADuC845BCP, ADuC847BCP, and ADuC848BCP (CSP package) have been qualified and tested with the base of the CSP  
package floating. The base of the CSP package should be soldered to the board, but left floating electrically, to ensure good  
mechanical stability.  
Flash/EE memory reliability characteristics apply to both the Flash/EE program memory and Flash/EE data memory.  
Rev. A | Page 9 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ABOSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
TA = 25°C, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 2.  
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings  
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any  
other conditions above those listed in the operational sections  
of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Parameter  
Rating  
AVDD to AGND  
AVDD to DGND  
DVDD to DGND  
DVDD to DGND  
AGND to DGND1  
AVDD to DVDD  
–0.3 V to +7 V  
–0.3 V to +7 V  
–0.3 V to +7 V  
–0.3 V to +7 V  
–0.3 V to +0.3 V  
–2 V to +5 V  
Analog Input Voltage to AGND2  
Reference Input Voltage to AGND  
AIN/REFIN Current (Indefinite)  
Digital Input Voltage to DGND  
Digital Output Voltage to DGND  
Operating Temperature Range  
Storage Temperature Range  
Junction Temperature  
θJA Thermal Impedance (MQFP)  
θJA Thermal Impedance (LFCSP)  
Lead Temperature, Soldering  
Vapor Phase (60 sec)  
–0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
–0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
30 mA  
–0.3 V to DVDD + 0.3 V  
–0.3 V to DVDD + 0.3 V  
–40°C to +125°C  
–65°C to +150°C  
150°C  
90°C/W  
52°C/W  
215°C  
220°C  
Infrared (15 sec)  
________________________  
1 AGND and DGND are shorted internally on the ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848.  
2 Applies to the P1.0 to P1.7 pins operating in analog or digital input modes.  
ESD CAUTION  
ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive device. Electrostatic charges as high as 4000 V readily accumulate on  
the human body and test equipment and can discharge without detection. Although this product features  
proprietary ESD protection circuitry, permanent damage may occur on devices subjected to high energy  
electrostatic discharges. Therefore, proper ESD precautions are recommended to avoid performance  
degradation or loss of functionality.  
Rev. A | Page 10 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40  
P2.7/PWMCLK  
P2.6/PWM1  
P2.5/PWM0  
P2.4/T2EX  
DGND  
1
2
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
P1.0/AIN1  
P1.1/AIN2  
P1.1/AIN2  
P1.2/AIN3/REFIN2+  
P1.3/AIN4/REFIN2–  
1
2
P2.7/PWMCLK  
42  
PIN 1  
IDENTIFIER  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
P2.6/PWM1  
P2.5/PWM0  
P2.4/T2EX  
DGND  
PIN 1  
3
4
IDENTIFIER  
P1.2/AIN3/REFIN2+  
P1.3/AIN4/REFIN2–  
3
AV  
DD  
4
5
AV  
DD  
AGND  
AGND  
5
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DV  
DD  
AGND  
6
7
6
DGND  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
REFIN–  
XTAL2  
REFIN–  
REFIN+  
P1.4/AIN5  
7
DV  
DD  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
REFIN+  
8
9
XTAL1  
8
35  
34  
33  
XTAL2  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
P1.4/AIN5  
P2.3/SS/T2  
P2.2/MISO  
P2.1/MOSI  
P2.0/SCLOCK (SPI)  
SDATA  
9
XTAL1  
P1.5/AIN6  
P1.6/AIN7/IEXC1  
P1.7/AIN8/IEXC2  
P1.5/AIN6 10  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
P2.3/SS/T2  
P2.2/MISO  
P2.1/MOSI  
11  
12  
32  
31  
30  
29  
P1.6/AIN7/IEXC1  
P1.7/AIN8/IEXC2  
AINCOM/DAC  
DAC  
P2.0/SCLOCK (SPI)  
SDATA  
AINCOM/DAC 13  
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26  
Figure 3. 56-Lead CSP Pin Configuration  
Figure 2. 52-Lead MQFP Pin Configuration  
Table 3. Pin Function Descriptions  
Pin No: Pin No:  
52-MQFP 56-CSP  
Mnemonic  
Type1  
Description  
1
2
3
56  
P1.0/AIN1  
I
By power-on default, P1.0/AIN1 is configured as the AIN1 analog input.  
AIN1 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the positive input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN2.  
P1.0 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally.  
On power-on default, P1.1/AIN2 is configured as the AIN2 analog input.  
AIN2 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the negative input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN1.  
P1.1 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally.  
1
P1.1/AIN2  
I
I
2
P1.2/AIN3/REFIN2+  
On power-on default, P1.2/AIN3 is configured as the AIN3 analog input.  
AIN3 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the positive input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN4.  
P1.2 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally. This pin also functions as a second external differential reference  
input, positive terminal.  
4
3
P1.3/AIN4/REFIN2−  
I
On power-on default, P1.3/AIN4 is configured as the AIN4 analog input.  
AIN4 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the negative input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN3.  
P1.3 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally. This pin also functions as a second external differential reference  
input, negative terminal.  
5
6
---  
4
5
6
AVDD  
AGND  
AGND  
S
S
S
Analog Supply Voltage.  
Analog Ground.  
A second analog ground is provided with the CSP version only.  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 11 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Pin No:  
52-MQFP 56-CSP  
Pin No:  
Mnemonic  
REFIN−  
REFIN+  
Type1  
Description  
7
8
9
7
8
9
I
I
I
External Differential Reference Input, Negative Terminal.  
External Differential Reference Input, Positive Terminal.  
On power-on default, P1.4/AIN5 is configured as the AIN5 analog input.  
P1.4/AIN5  
AIN5 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the positive input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN6.  
P1.0 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally.  
10  
11  
10  
11  
P1.5/AIN6  
I
On power-on default, P1.5/AIN6 is configured as the AIN6 analog input.  
AIN6 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the negative input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN5.  
P1.1 has no digital output driver. It can function as a digital input for which 0  
must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be driven high or  
low externally.  
P1.6/AIN7/IEXC1  
I/O  
On power-on default, P1.6/AIN7 is configured as the AIN7 analog input.  
AIN7 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the positive input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN8. One or both  
current sources can also be configured at this pin.  
P1.6 has no digital output driver. It can, however, function as a digital input for  
which 0 must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be  
driven high or low externally.  
12  
13  
12  
13  
P1.7/AIN8/IEXC2  
AINCOM/DAC  
I/O  
I/O  
On power-on default, P1.7/AIN8 is configured as the AIN8 analog input.  
AIN8 can be used as a pseudo differential input when used with AINCOM or as  
the negative input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN7. One or both  
current sources can also be configured at this pin.  
P1.7 has no digital output driver. It can, however, function as a digital input for  
which 0 must be written to the port bit. As a digital input, this pin must be  
driven high or low externally.  
All analog inputs can be referred to this pin, provided that a relevant pseudo  
differential input mode is selected. This pin also functions as an alternative pin  
out for the DAC.  
14  
----  
14  
15  
DAC  
AIN9  
O
I
The voltage output from the DAC, if enabled, appears at this pin.  
AIN9 can be used as a pseudo differential analog input when used with AINCOM  
or as the positive input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN10 (CSP  
version only).  
----  
15  
16  
17  
AIN10  
I
AIN10 can be used as a pseudo differential analog input when used with  
AINCOM or as the negative input of a fully differential pair when used with AIN9  
(CSP version only).  
Reset Input. A high level on this pin for 16 core clock cycles while the oscillator is  
running resets the device. This pin has an internal weak pull-down and a Schmitt  
trigger input stage.  
RESET  
I
16–19  
22–25  
18–21  
24–27  
P3.0–P3.7  
I/O  
P3.0 to P3.7 are bidirectional port pins with internal pull-up resistors. Port 3 pins  
that have 1s written to them are pulled high by the internal pull-up resistors,  
and in that state can be used as inputs. As inputs, Port 3 pins being pulled  
externally low source current because of the internal pull-up resistors. When  
driving a 0-to-1 output transition, a strong pull-up is active for one core clock  
period of the instruction cycle.  
Port 3 pins also have the various secondary functions described below.  
Receiver Data for UART Serial Port.  
Transmitter Data for UART Serial Port.  
External Interrupt 0. This pin can also be used as a gate control input to Timer 0.  
External Interrupt 1. This pin can also be used as a gate control input to Timer 1.  
Timer/Counter 0 External Input.  
Timer/Counter 1 External Input.  
External Data Memory Write Strobe. This pin latches the data byte from Port 0  
into an external data memory.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
22  
23  
24  
18  
19  
20  
21  
24  
25  
26  
P3.0/RxD  
P3.1/TxD  
P3.2/INT0  
P3.3/INT1  
P3.4/T0  
P3.5/T1  
P3.6/WR  
Rev. A | Page 12 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Pin No:  
52-MQFP 56-CSP  
Pin No:  
Mnemonic  
Type1  
Description  
25  
27  
P3.7/RD  
External Data Memory Read Strobe. This pin enables the data from an external  
data memory to Port 0.  
22, 36, 51  
20, 34, 48  
21, 35, 47  
DVDD  
DGND  
S
S
Digital Supply Voltage.  
Digital Ground.  
23, 37,  
38, 50  
28  
26  
SCLK (I2C)  
I/O  
Serial Interface Clock for the I2C Interface. As an input, this pin is a Schmitt-  
triggered input. A weak internal pull-up is present on this pin unless it is  
outputting logic low. This pin can also be controlled in software as a digital  
output pin.  
27  
29  
SDATA  
I/O  
I/O  
Serial Data Pin for the I2C Interface. As an input, this pin has a weak internal pull-  
up present unless it is outputting logic low.  
28–31,  
36–39  
30–33,  
39–42  
P2.0–P2.7  
Port 2 is a bidirectional port with internal pull-up resistors. Port 2 pins that have  
1s written to them are pulled high by the internal pull-up resistors, and in that  
state can be used as inputs. As inputs, Port 2 pins being pulled externally low  
source current because of the internal pull-up resistors. Port 2 emits the middle  
and high-order address bytes during accesses to the 24-bit external data  
memory space.  
Port 2 pins also have the various secondary functions described below.  
28  
29  
30  
31  
P2.0/SCLOCK (SPI)  
P2.1/MOSI  
Serial Interface Clock for the SPI Interface. As an input this pin is a Schmitt-  
triggered input. A weak internal pull-up is present on this pin unless it is  
outputting logic low.  
Serial Master Output/Slave Input Data for the SPI Interface. A strong internal  
pull-up is present on this pin when the SPI interface outputs a logic high. A  
strong internal pull-down is present on this pin when the SPI interface outputs a  
logic low.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
P2.2/MISO  
P2.3/SS/T2  
Master Input/Slave Output for the SPI Interface. A weak pull-up is present on this  
input pin.  
Slave Select Input for the SPI Interface. A weak pull-up is present on this pin.  
For both package options, this pin can also be used to provide a clock input to  
Timer 2. When enabled, Counter 2 is incremented in response to a negative  
transition on the T2 input pin.  
36  
39  
P2.4/T2EX  
Control Input to Timer 2. When enabled, a negative transition on the T2EX input  
pin causes a Timer 2 capture or reload event.  
37  
38  
39  
32  
33  
40  
41  
42  
34  
35  
P2.5/PWM0  
P2.6/PWM1  
P2.7/PWMCLK  
XTAL1  
If the PWM is enabled, the PWM0 output appears at this pin.  
If the PWM is enabled, the PWM1 output appears at this pin.  
If the PWM is enabled, an external PWM clock can be provided at this pin.  
Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter.  
Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter. See the Hardware Design  
Considerations section for a description.  
I
O
XTAL2  
40  
43  
EA  
External Access Enable, Logic Input. When held high, this input enables the  
device to fetch code from internal program memory locations 0000H to F7FFH.  
No external program memory access is available on the ADuC845, ADuC847, or  
ADuC848. To determine the mode of code execution, the EA pin is sampled at  
the end of an external RESET assertion or as part of a device power cycle. EA can  
also be used as an external emulation I/O pin, and therefore the voltage level at  
this pin must not be changed during normal operation because this might  
cause an emulation interrupt that halts code execution.  
41  
42  
44  
45  
PSEN  
ALE  
O
O
Program Store Enable, Logic Output. This function is not used on the ADuC845,  
ADuC847, or ADuC848. This pin remains high during internal program execution.  
PSEN can also be used to enable serial download mode when pulled low  
through a resistor at the end of an external RESET assertion or as part of a device  
power cycle.  
Address Latch Enable, Logic Output. This output is used to latch the low byte  
(and page byte for 24-bit data address space accesses) of the address to external  
memory during external data memory access cycles. It can be disabled by  
setting the PCON.4 bit in the PCON SFR.  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 13 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Pin No:  
52-MQFP 56-CSP  
Pin No:  
Mnemonic  
Type1  
Description  
43–46,  
49–52  
46–49,  
52–55  
P0.0–P0.7  
I/O  
These pins are part of Port 0, which is an 8-bit open-drain bidirectional I/O port.  
Port 0 pins that have 1s written to them float, and, in that state, can be used as  
high impedance inputs. An external pull-up resistor is required on P0 outputs to  
force a valid logic high level externally. Port 0 is also the multiplexed low-order  
address and data bus during accesses to external data memory. In this  
application, Port 0 uses strong internal pull-ups when emitting 1s.  
1 I = input, O = output, S = supply.  
Rev. A | Page 14 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848 are single-cycle,  
12.58 MIPs, 8052 core upgrades to the ADuC834 and ADuC836.  
They include additional analog inputs for applications requiring  
more ADC channels.  
The devices operate from a 32 kHz crystal with an on-chip PLL  
generating a high frequency clock of 12.58 MHz. This clock is  
routed through a programmable clock divider from which the  
MCU core clock operating frequency is generated. The micro-  
controller core is an optimized single-cycle 8052 offering up to  
12.58 MIPs performance while maintaining 8051 instruction set  
compatibility.  
The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848 are complete smart  
transducer front ends. The family integrates high resolution Σ-Δ  
ADCs with flexible, up to 10-channel input multiplexing, a fast  
8-bit MCU, and program/data Flash/EE memory on a single chip.  
The available nonvolatile Flash/EE program memory options  
are 62 kbytes, 32 kbytes, and 8 kbytes. 4 kbytes of nonvolatile  
Flash/EE data memory and 2304 bytes of data RAM are also  
provided on-chip. The program memory can be configured as  
data memory to give up to 60 kbytes of NV data memory in  
data logging applications.  
The ADuC845 includes two (primary and auxiliary) 24-bit Σ-Δ  
ADCs with internal buffering and PGA on the primary ADC.  
The ADuC847 includes the same primary ADC as the ADuC845  
(auxiliary ADC removed). The ADuC848 is a 16-bit ADC  
version of the ADuC847.  
On-chip factory firmware supports in-circuit serial download  
and debug modes (via UART), as well as single-pin emulation  
The ADCs incorporate flexible input multiplexing, a temperature  
sensor (ADuC845 only), and a PGA (primary ADC only)  
allowing direct measurement of low-level signals. The ADCs  
include on-chip digital filtering and programmable output data  
rates that are intended for measuring wide dynamic range, low  
frequency signals, such as those in weigh scale, strain gage,  
pressure transducer, or temperature measurement applications.  
mode via the  
pin. The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848  
EA  
are supported by the QuickStart™ development system featuring  
low cost software and hardware development tools.  
Rev. A | Page 15 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55  
56  
1
2
3
9
10 11 12  
30 31 32 33 39 40 41 42  
16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25  
56  
1
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
ADuC845  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUT DAC  
2
ADC  
CONTROL  
AND  
DAC  
CONTROL  
BUF  
14  
PRIMARY ADC  
24-BIT  
Σ-ADC  
DAC  
3
BUF  
PGA  
9
CALIBRATION  
AIN  
MUX  
AIN6 10  
AIN7 11  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
40  
41  
42  
ADC  
CONTROL  
AND  
PWM0  
PWM1  
AUXILIARY ADC  
24-BIT  
PWM  
CONTROL  
Σ-DAC  
AIN8 12  
MUX  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
PWM  
Σ-ADC  
AIN9* 15  
AIN10* 16  
AINCOM 13  
CALIBRATION  
PWMCLK  
62 kBYTES PROGRAM/  
FLASH/EE  
BAND GAP  
REFERENCE  
2304 BYTES  
USER RAM  
24  
25  
33  
39  
T0  
T1  
16-BIT  
COUNTER  
TIMERS  
SINGLE-  
CYCLE  
8052  
TEMP  
SENSOR  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
4 kBYTES DATA/  
FLASH/EE  
T2  
REFIN+  
REFIN–  
8
7
V
REF  
T2EX  
DETECT  
MCU  
POWER SUPPLY  
MONITOR  
CORE  
2 × DATA POINTERS  
11-BIT STACK POINTER  
20  
21  
INT0  
INT1  
PLL WITH PROG.  
CLOCK DIVIDER  
200µA  
200µA  
DOWNLOADER  
DEBUGGER  
WAKE-UP/  
RTC TIMER  
CURRENT  
SOURCE  
MIX  
IEXC1 11  
IEXC1 12  
2
UART  
TIMER  
SPI SERIAL  
I C SERIAL  
UART  
SERIAL PORT  
POR  
INTERFACE INTERFACE  
OSC  
4
5
6
22 36 51  
23 37 38 50  
17  
18 19  
44 43 45  
30 31 32 33  
28 29  
34  
35  
*THE PIN NUMBERS REFER TO THE CSP PACKAGE ONLY.  
SHADED AREAS ARE UPGRADES FROM THE ADuC834, AND INCLUDE A SINGLE-CYCLE CORE, UP TO 10 ADC INPUT  
CHANNELS (8 ON THE MQFP PACKAGE). THE AUXILIARY ADC IS NOW 24-BIT.  
Figure 4. Detailed Block Diagram of the ADuC845  
Rev. A | Page 16 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55  
56  
1
2
3
9
10 11 12  
30 31 32 33 39 40 41 42  
16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25  
56  
1
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
ADuC847  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUT DAC  
2
ADC  
CONTROL  
AND  
DAC  
CONTROL  
PRIMARY ADC  
24-BIT  
Σ-ADC  
BUF  
14  
DAC  
3
BUF  
PGA  
9
CALIBRATION  
AIN  
MUX  
AIN6 10  
AIN7 11  
AIN8 12  
AIN9* 15  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
40  
41  
42  
PWM0  
PWM1  
PWM  
CONTROL  
Σ-DAC  
MUX  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
PWM  
16  
13  
AIN10*  
PWMCLK  
AINCOM  
62 kBYTES PROGRAM/  
FLASH/EE  
BAND GAP  
REFERENCE  
2304 BYTES  
USER RAM  
24  
25  
33  
39  
T0  
T1  
16-BIT  
COUNTER  
TIMERS  
SINGLE-  
CYCLE  
8052  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
4 kBYTES DATA/  
FLASH/EE  
T2  
REFIN+  
REFIN–  
8
7
V
REF  
T2EX  
DETECT  
MCU  
CORE  
POWER SUPPLY  
MONITOR  
2 × DATA POINTERS  
11-BIT STACK POINTER  
20  
21  
INT0  
INT1  
PLL WITH PROG.  
CLOCK DIVIDER  
200µA  
200µA  
DOWNLOADER  
DEBUGGER  
WAKE-UP/  
RTC TIMER  
CURRENT  
SOURCE  
MIX  
IEXC1 11  
IEXC1 12  
2
SPI SERIAL  
I C SERIAL  
UART  
SERIAL PORT  
UART  
TIMER  
POR  
INTERFACE INTERFACE  
OSC  
4
5
6
22 36 51  
23 37 38 50  
17  
18 19  
44 43 45  
30 31 32 33  
28 29  
34  
35  
*THE PIN NUMBERS REFER TO THE CSP PACKAGE ONLY.  
SHADED AREAS ARE UPGRADES FROM THE ADuC834, AND INCLUDE A SINGLE-CYCLE CORE, UP TO 10 ADC INPUT  
CHANNELS (8 ON THE MQFP PACKAGE).  
Figure 5. Detailed Block Diagram of the ADuC847  
Rev. A | Page 17 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55  
56  
1
2
3
9
10 11 12  
30 31 32 33 39 40 41 42  
16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25  
56  
1
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
ADuC848  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUT DAC  
2
ADC  
CONTROL  
AND  
DAC  
CONTROL  
PRIMARY ADC  
16-BIT  
Σ-ADC  
BUF  
14  
DAC  
3
BUF  
PGA  
9
CALIBRATION  
AIN  
MUX  
AIN6 10  
AIN7 11  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
40  
41  
42  
PWM0  
PWM1  
PWM  
CONTROL  
Σ-DAC  
AIN8 12  
MUX  
DUAL  
16-BIT  
PWM  
AIN9* 15  
AIN10* 16  
AINCOM 13  
PWMCLK  
62 kBYTES PROGRAM/  
FLASH/EE  
BAND GAP  
REFERENCE  
2304 BYTES  
USER RAM  
24  
25  
33  
39  
T0  
T1  
16-BIT  
COUNTER  
TIMERS  
SINGLE-  
CYCLE  
8052  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
4 kBYTES DATA/  
FLASH/EE  
T2  
REFIN+  
REFIN–  
8
7
V
REF  
T2EX  
DETECT  
MCU  
CORE  
POWER SUPPLY  
MONITOR  
2 × DATA POINTERS  
11-BIT STACK POINTER  
20  
21  
INT0  
INT1  
PLL WITH PROG.  
CLOCK DIVIDER  
200µA  
200µA  
DOWNLOADER  
DEBUGGER  
WAKE-UP/  
RTC TIMER  
CURRENT  
SOURCE  
MIX  
IEXC1 11  
IEXC1 12  
2
UART  
TIMER  
SPI SERIAL  
I C SERIAL  
UART  
SERIAL PORT  
POR  
INTERFACE INTERFACE  
OSC  
4
5
6
22 36 51  
23 37 38 50  
17  
18 19  
44 43 45  
30 31 32 33  
28 29  
34  
35  
*THE PIN NUMBERS REFER TO THE CSP PACKAGE ONLY.  
SHADED AREAS ARE UPGRADES FROM THE ADuC834, AND INCLUDE A SINGLE-CYCLE CORE, UP TO 10 ADC INPUT  
CHANNELS (8 ON THE MQFP PACKAGE).  
Figure 6. Detailed Block Diagram of the ADuC848  
8052 INSTRUCTION SET  
ALE  
Table 4 documents the number of clock cycles required for each  
instruction. Most instructions are executed in one or two clock  
cycles resulting in 12.58 MIPs peak performance when operating  
at PLLCON = 00H.  
On the ADuC834, the output on the ALE pin is a clock at 1/6th  
of the core operating frequency. On the ADuC845, ADuC847,  
and ADuC848, the ALE pin operates as follows. For a single  
machine cycle instruction, ALE is high for the entire machine  
cycle. For a two or more machine cycle instruction, ALE is high  
for the first machine cycle and then low for the remainder of  
the machine cycles.  
TIMER OPERATION  
Timers on a standard 8052 increment by one with each machine  
cycle. On the ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848, one machine  
cycle is equal to one clock cycle; therefore, the timers increment  
at the same rate as the core clock.  
EXTERNAL MEMORY ACCESS  
The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848 do not support  
external program memory access, but the parts can access up to  
16 MB (24 address bits) of external data memory. When  
accessing external RAM, the EWAIT register might need to be  
programmed in order to give extra machine cycles to MOVX  
commands to allow for differing external RAM access speeds.  
Rev. A | Page 18 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
COMPLETE SFR MAP  
SPICON  
DACL  
DACH  
DACCON  
ISPI  
FFH  
WCOL  
SPE  
FDH  
SPIM  
FCH  
CPOL CPHA SPR1  
SPR0  
F8H  
RESERVED RESERVED  
RESERVED RESERVED  
SPIDAT  
RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
0
FEH  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FBH  
0
0
0
0
FAH  
1
F9H  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F8H  
05H  
FBH 00H FCH 00H FDH 00H  
I2CADD1  
RESERVED  
B
NOT USED  
GN0H 2  
F7H  
EFH  
E7H  
0
F6H  
0
0
0
F5H  
MCO  
F4H  
MDI  
F3H  
F2H  
0
F1H  
F0H  
I2CI  
E8H  
E0H  
D8H  
F0H  
00H  
F2H  
7FH  
F7H  
00H  
GN0M 2  
GN1L2  
GN1H 2  
MDO  
MDE  
GN0L2  
OF0L  
I2CCON  
E8H  
ACC  
E0H 00H E1H  
ADCSTAT  
D8H  
I2CM  
EBH  
I2CRS I2CTX  
EAH  
RESERVED RESERVED  
ADuC845 ONLY ADuC845 ONLY  
xxH ECH xxH EDH xxH  
0
0
0
0
0
EEH  
E6H  
DEH  
EDH  
ECH  
0
0
0
0
0
E9H  
E1H  
D9H  
0
0
0
0
0
00H E9H  
xxH EAH  
xxH EBH  
OF0M  
xxH E2H  
OF0H  
OF1L OF1H  
ADC0CON2  
RESERVED  
ADuC845 ONLY ADuC845 ONLY  
xxH E5H  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
BITS  
E5H  
E4H  
E3H  
E2H  
xxH E3H  
xxH E4H  
xxH E6H  
00H  
ADC0L  
NOT AVAILABLE  
ON ADuC848  
ADC0M  
ADC0H  
ADC1M ADC1H  
ADC1L  
PSMCON  
DFH DEH  
PLLCON  
RDY0  
DFH  
RDY1  
CAL NOXREF ERR0  
DDH  
ERR1  
DAH  
ADuC845 ONLY ADuC845 ONLY ADuC845 ONLY  
0
0
0
0
DCH  
0
DBH  
0
00H D9H  
00H DAH 00H DBH 00H DCH 00H  
DDH 00H DEH 00H  
PSW  
ADCMODE ADC0CON1 ADC1CON  
SF  
ICON  
CY  
D7H  
AC  
D6H  
F0  
D5H  
RS1  
D4H  
RS0  
D3H  
OV  
D2H  
FI  
D1H  
P
D0H  
RESERVED  
ADuC845 ONLY  
07H D3H 00H D4H  
0
0
0
D0H 00H D1H  
08H D2H  
45H D5H  
00H  
D7H  
53H  
T2CON  
C8H 00H  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
TL2 TH2  
TF2  
CFH  
EXF2  
CEH  
RCLK  
CDH  
TCLK EXEN2  
CCH  
TR2  
CNT2  
C9H  
CAP2  
C8H  
RESERVED  
RESERVED RESERVED  
0
0
CBH  
0 CAH  
CAH 00H CBH 00H CCH 00H CDH 00H  
CHIPID  
EDARH  
00H C7H  
00H  
EDARL  
WDCON  
C0H 10H  
PRE3  
PRE2  
C6H  
PRE1  
C5H  
WDIR  
C3H  
WDS  
C2H  
WDE WDWR  
PRE0  
C4H  
RESERVED  
ECON  
RESERVED RESERVED  
RESERVED  
C7H  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
C1H  
0
C0H  
0
C2H  
A0H  
C6H  
IP  
EDATA1  
EDATA2  
EDATA3  
EDATA4  
BFH 00H  
SPH  
PADC  
BEH  
PT2  
BDH  
PS  
BCH  
PT1  
BBH  
PX1  
BAH  
PT0  
B9H  
PX0  
B8H  
RESERVED RESERVED  
BFH  
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
B8H  
B0H  
00H B9H  
00H  
BCH 00H BDH 00H BEH 00H  
PWM1L  
B3H  
PWM1H  
P3  
PWM0L  
PWM0H  
B2H  
RD  
B7H  
WR  
B6H  
T1  
B5H  
T0  
B4H  
INT1  
B3H  
INT0  
B2H  
TxD  
B1H  
RxD  
B0H  
RESERVED RESERVED  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
B4H  
00H  
FFH  
B1H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
CFG845/7/8  
00H  
B7H  
PWMCON  
IE  
IEIP2  
00H A9H A 0H  
TIMECON HTHSEC1  
A1H  
SBUF  
00H 99H 00H 9AH  
EA  
AFH  
EADC  
ET2  
ES  
ACH  
ET1  
ABH  
EX1  
AAH  
ET0  
A9H  
EX0  
A8H  
RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED  
AEH  
0
ADH  
A5H  
0
1
0
1
0
1
AEH  
00H  
AFH  
DPCON  
A7H 00H  
EWAIT  
00H  
00H  
A8H  
A0H  
HOUR1  
A5H 00H  
T3FD  
9DH  
INTVAL  
MIN1  
00H A4H 00H  
I2CADD  
9BH 55H  
P2  
SEC1  
00H A3H  
I2CDAT  
00H  
A7H  
A6H  
1
A4H  
A3H  
A2H  
A1H  
A0H  
A6H  
00H  
FFH  
00H A2H  
T3CON  
SCON  
SM0  
9FH  
SM1  
SM2  
REN  
9CH  
TB8  
9BH  
RB8  
9AH  
TI  
99H  
RI  
98H  
RESERVED  
9EH  
0
9DH  
95H  
98H  
00H 9EH  
00H 9FH  
P1  
T2EX  
91H  
T2  
90H  
RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED  
97H  
96H  
1
0
1
94H  
93H  
92H  
90H  
FFH  
TCON  
TMOD  
TL0  
TL1  
TH0  
TH1  
00H  
TF1  
8FH  
TR1  
8EH  
TF0  
8DH  
TR0  
8CH  
IE1  
8BH  
IT1  
8AH  
IE0  
89H  
IT0  
88H  
RESERVED RESERVED  
88H 00H 89H  
00H 8AH  
00H 8BH  
00H 8CH  
00H 8DH  
P0  
SP  
DPL  
DPH  
DPP  
00H  
PCON  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
87H  
86H  
85H  
84H  
83H  
82H  
81H  
80H  
80H  
FFH 81H  
07H 82H 00H 83H  
00H 84H  
87H  
00H  
1
2
THESE SFRs MAINTAIN THEIR PRE-RESET VALUES AFTER A RESET IF TIMECON.0 = 1.  
CALIBRATION COEFFICIENTS ARE PRECONFIGURED ON POWER-UP TO FACTORY CALIBRATED VALUES.  
SFR MAP KEY:  
THESE BITS ARE CONTAINED IN THIS BYTE.  
MNEMONIC  
TCON  
IT0  
88H  
BIT MNEMONIC  
BIT ADDRESS  
IE0  
89H  
0
0
RESET DEFAULT VALUE  
88H 00H  
RESET DEFAULT BIT VALUE  
SFR ADDRESS  
SFR NOTE:  
SFRs WHOSE ADDRESSES END IN 0H OR 8H ARE BIT ADDRESSABLE.  
Figure 7. Complete SFR Map for the ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848  
Rev. A | Page 19 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
8051 INSTRUCTION SET  
Table 4. Optimized Single-Cycle 8051 Instruction Set  
Mnemonic  
Arithmetic  
A A,Rn  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles1  
Add register to A  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
4
9
2
ADD A,@Ri  
ADD A,dir  
ADD A,#data  
ADDC A,Rn  
ADDC A,@Ri  
ADDC A,dir  
ADD A,#data  
SUBB A,Rn  
SUBB A,@Ri  
SUBB A,dir  
SUBB A,#data  
INC A  
INC Rn  
INC @Ri  
INC dir  
INC DPTR  
DEC A  
Add indirect memory to A  
Add direct byte to A  
Add immediate to A  
Add register to A with carry  
Add indirect memory to A with carry  
Add direct byte to A with carry  
Add immediate to A with carry  
Subtract register from A with borrow  
Subtract indirect memory from A with borrow  
Subtract direct from A with borrow  
Subtract immediate from A with borrow  
Increment A  
Increment register  
Increment indirect memory  
Increment direct byte  
Increment data pointer  
Decrement A  
Decrement register  
DEC Rn  
DEC @Ri  
DEC dir  
MUL AB  
DIV AB  
DA A  
Decrement indirect memory  
Decrement direct byte  
Multiply A by B  
Divide A by B  
Decimal adjust A  
Logic  
ANL A,Rn  
ANL A,@Ri  
ANL A,dir  
ANL A,#data  
ANL dir,A  
ANL dir,#data  
ORL A,Rn  
ORL A,@Ri  
ORL A,dir  
ORL A,#data  
ORL dir,A  
ORL dir,#data  
XRL A,Rn  
XRL A,@Ri  
XRL A,#data  
XRL dir,A  
XRL A,dir  
XRL dir,#data  
CLR A  
AND register to A  
AND indirect memory to A  
AND direct byte to A  
AND immediate to A  
AND A to direct byte  
AND immediate data to direct byte  
OR register to A  
OR indirect memory to A  
OR direct byte to A  
OR immediate to A  
OR A to direct byte  
OR immediate data to direct byte  
Exclusive-OR register to A  
Exclusive-OR indirect memory to A  
Exclusive-OR immediate to A  
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte  
Exclusive-OR indirect memory to A  
Exclusive-OR immediate data to direct  
Clear A  
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
CPL A  
SWAP A  
RL A  
Complement A  
Swap Nibbles of A  
Rotate A left  
Rev. A | Page 20 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mnemonic  
RLC A  
RR A  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles1  
Rotate A left through carry  
Rotate A right  
Rotate A right through carry  
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRC A  
Data Transfer  
MOV A,Rn  
MOV A,@Ri  
MOV Rn,A  
MOV @Ri,A  
MOV A,dir  
MOV A,#data  
MOV Rn,#data  
MOV dir,A  
MOV Rn, dir  
MOV dir, Rn  
MOV @Ri,#data  
MOV dir,@Ri  
MOV @Ri,dir  
MOV dir,dir  
MOV dir,#data  
MOV DPTR,#data  
MOVC A,@A+DPTR  
MOVC A,@A+PC  
MOVX2 A,@Ri  
MOVX2 A,@DPTR  
MOVX2 @Ri,A  
MOVX2 @DPTR,A  
PUSH dir  
Move register to A  
Move indirect memory to A  
Move A to register  
Move A to indirect memory  
Move direct byte to A  
Move immediate to A  
Move register to immediate  
Move A to direct byte  
Move register to direct byte  
Move direct to register  
Move immediate to indirect memory  
Move indirect to direct memory  
Move direct to indirect memory  
Move direct byte to direct byte  
Move immediate to direct byte  
Move immediate to data pointer  
Move code byte relative DPTR to A  
Move code byte relative PC to A  
Move external (A8) data to A  
Move external (A16) data to A  
Move A to external data (A8)  
Move A to external data (A16)  
Push direct byte onto stack  
Pop direct byte from stack  
Exchange A and register  
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
1
2
2
2
POP dir  
XCH A,Rn  
XCH A,@Ri  
XCHD A,@Ri  
XCH A,dir  
Exchange A and indirect memory  
Exchange A and indirect memory nibble  
Exchange A and direct byte  
Boolean  
CLR C  
CLR bit  
SETB C  
SETB bit  
CPL C  
CPL bit  
ANL C,bit  
ANL C,/bit  
ORL C,bit  
Clear carry  
Clear direct bit  
Set carry  
Set direct bit  
Complement carry  
Complement direct bit  
AND direct bit and carry  
AND direct bit inverse to carry  
OR direct bit and carry  
OR direct bit inverse to carry  
Move direct bit to carry  
Move carry to direct bit  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ORL C,/bit  
MOV C,bit  
MOV bit,C  
Branching  
JMP @A+DPTR  
RET  
Jump indirect relative to DPTR  
Return from subroutine  
Return from interrupt  
Absolute jump to subroutine  
Absolute jump unconditional  
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
3
3
RETI  
ACALL addr11  
AJMP addr11  
Footnotes at end of table.  
Rev. A | Page 21 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mnemonic  
SJMP rel  
JC rel  
JNC rel  
JZ rel  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles1  
Short jump (relative address)  
Jump on carry = 1  
Jump on carry = 0  
Jump on accumulator = 0  
Jump on accumulator ! = 0  
Decrement register, JNZ relative  
Long jump unconditional  
Long jump to subroutine  
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
JNZ rel  
DJNZ Rn,rel  
LJMP  
LCALL3 addr16  
JB bit,rel  
Jump on direct bit = 1  
Jump on direct bit = 0  
JNB bit,rel  
JBC bit,rel  
CJNE A,dir,rel  
CJNE A,#data,rel  
CJNE Rn,#data,rel  
CJNE @Ri,#data,rel  
DJNZ dir,rel  
Miscellaneous  
NOP  
Jump on direct bit = 1 and clear  
Compare A, direct JNE relative  
Compare A, immediate JNE relative  
Compare register, immediate JNE relative  
Compare indirect, immediate JNE relative  
Decrement direct byte, JNZ relative  
No operation  
1
1
1 One cycle is one clock.  
2 MOVX instructions are four cycles when they have 0 wait state. Cycles of MOVX instructions are 4 + n cycles when they have n wait states as programmed via EWAIT.  
3 LCALL instructions are three cycles when the LCALL instruction comes from an interrupt.  
Flash/EE Data Memory  
MEMORY ORGANIZATION  
The user has 4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory available that  
The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848 contain four memory  
can be accessed indirectly by using a group of registers mapped  
blocks:  
into the special function register (SFR) space. For details, see the  
62 kbytes/32 kbytes/8 kbytes of on-chip Flash/EE program  
memory  
Nonvolatile Flash/EE Memory section.  
General-Purpose RAM  
4 kbytes of on-chip Flash/EE data memory  
256 bytes of general-purpose RAM  
2 kbytes of internal XRAM  
The general-purpose RAM is divided into two separate  
memories, the upper and the lower 128 bytes of RAM. The  
lower 128 bytes of RAM can be accessed through direct or  
indirect addressing. The upper 128 bytes of RAM can be  
accessed only through indirect addressing becuase it shares the  
same address space as the SFR space, which must be accessed  
through direct addressing.  
Flash/EE Program Memory  
The parts provide up to 62 kbytes of Flash/EE program memory  
to run user code. All further references to Flash/EE program  
memory assume the 62-kbyte option.  
The lower 128 bytes of internal data memory are mapped as  
shown in Figure 8. The lowest 32 bytes are grouped into four  
banks of eight registers addressed as R0 to R7. The next 16 bytes  
(128 bits), locations 20H to 2FH above the register banks, form  
a block of directly addressable bit locations at Bit Addresses  
00H to 7FH. The stack can be located anywhere in the internal  
memory address space, and the stack depth can be expanded up  
to 2048 bytes.  
When  
is pulled high externally during a power cycle or a  
EA  
hardware reset, the parts default to code execution from their  
internal 62 kbytes of Flash/EE program memory. The parts do  
not support the rollover from internal code space to external  
code space. No external code space is available on the parts.  
Permanently embedded firmware allows code to be serially  
downloaded to the 62 kbytes of internal code space via the  
UART serial port while the device is in-circuit. No external  
hardware is required.  
Reset initializes the stack pointer to location 07H. Any call or  
push pre-increments the SP before loading the stack. Therefore,  
loading the stack starts from location 08H, which is also the  
first register (R0) of Register Bank 1. Thus, if one is going to use  
more than one register bank, the stack pointer should be  
initialized to an area of RAM not used for data storage.  
During run time, 56 kbytes of the 62-kbyte program memory  
can be reprogrammed. This means that the code space can be  
upgraded in the field by using a user-defined protocol running  
on the parts, or it can be used as a data memory. For details, see  
the Nonvolatile Flash/EE Memory section.  
Rev. A | Page 22 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
7FH  
2FH  
is possible (by setting CFG845.7/ADuC847.7/ADuC848.7) to  
enable the 11-bit extended stack pointer. In this case, the stack  
rolls over from FFH in RAM to 0100H in XRAM.  
GENERAL-PURPOSE  
AREA  
30H  
The 11-bit stack pointer is visible in the SPH and SP SFRs. The  
SP SFR is located at 81H as with a standard 8052. The SPH SFR  
is located at B7H. The 3 LSBs of the SPH SFR contain the 3  
extra bits necessary to extend the 8-bit stack pointer in the SP  
SFR into an 11-bit stack pointer.  
BIT-ADDRESSABLE  
(BIT ADDRESSES)  
BANKS  
SELECTED  
VIA  
20H  
18H  
10H  
BITS IN PSW  
1FH  
17H  
0FH  
07H  
11  
10  
01  
00  
07FFH  
FOUR BANKS OF EIGHT  
REGISTERS  
R0 TO R7  
08H  
00H  
UPPER 1792  
BYTES OF  
ON-CHIP XRAM  
(DATA + STACK  
FOR EXSP = 1,  
DATA ONLY  
RESET VALUE OF  
STACK POINTER  
Figure 8. Lower 128 Bytes of Internal Data Memory  
FOR EXSP = 0)  
Internal XRAM  
CFG845/7/8.7 = 0 CFG845/7/8.7 = 1  
The ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848 contain 2 kbytes of  
on-chip extended data memory. This memory, although on-  
chip, is accessed via the MOVX instruction. The 2 kbytes of  
internal XRAM are mapped into the bottom 2 kbytes of the  
external address space if the CFG84x.0 (Table 7) bit is set;  
otherwise, access to the external data memory occurs just like a  
standard 8051.  
100H  
FFH  
256 BYTES OF  
LOWER 256  
ON-CHIP DATA  
BYTES OF  
RAM  
(DATA +  
STACK)  
ON-CHIP XRAM  
(DATA ONLY)  
00H  
00H  
Figure 10. Extended Stack Pointer Operation  
External Data Memory (External XRAM)  
Even with the CFG84x.0 bit set, access to the external (off chip),  
XRAM occurs once the 24-bit DPTR is greater than 0007FFH.  
There is no support for external program memory access to the  
parts. However, just like a standard 8051 compatible core, the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 can access external data  
memory using a MOVX instruction. The MOVX instruction  
automatically outputs the various control strobes required to  
access the data memory. The parts, however, can access up to  
16 Mbytes of external data memory. This is an enhancement of  
the 64 kbytes of external data memory space available on a  
standard 8051 compatible core. See the Hardware Design  
Considerations section for details.  
FFFFFFH  
FFFFFFH  
EXTERNAL  
DATA  
MEMORY  
SPACE  
EXTERNAL  
DATA  
MEMORY  
SPACE  
(24-BIT  
ADDRESS  
SPACE)  
(24-BIT  
ADDRESS  
SPACE)  
When accessing external RAM, the EWAIT register might need  
to be programmed to give extra machine cycles to the MOVX  
operation. This is to account for differing external RAM access  
speeds.  
000800H  
0007FFH  
2 kBYTES  
ON-CHIP  
XRAM  
000000H  
000000H  
CFG845/7/8.0 = 0  
CFG845/7/8.0 = 1  
EWAIT SFR  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
9FH  
00H  
No  
Figure 9. Internal and External XRAM  
When enabled and when accessing the internal XRAM, the P0  
and P2 port pin operations, as well as the and strobes,  
RD  
WR  
This special function register (SFR), when programmed,  
dictates the number of wait states for the MOVX instruction.  
The value can vary between 0H and 7H. The MOVX instruction  
increases by one machine cycle (4 + n, where n = EWAIT  
number in decimal) for every increase in the EWAIT value.  
do not operate as a standard 8051 MOVX instruction. This  
allows the user to use these port pins as standard I/O. The  
internal XRAM can be configured as part of the extended 11-bit  
stack pointer. By default, the stack operates exactly like an 8052  
in that it rolls over from FFH to 00H in the general-purpose  
RAM. On the ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848, however, it  
Rev. A | Page 23 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Data Pointer (DPTR)  
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS (SFRs)  
The data pointer is made up of three 8-bit registers: DPP (page  
byte), DPH (high byte), and DPL (low byte). These provide  
memory addresses for internal code and data memory access.  
The DPTR can be manipulated as a 16-bit register (DPTR =  
DPH, DPL), although INC DPTR instructions automatically  
carry over to DPP, or as three independent 8-bit registers (DPP,  
DPH, DPL).  
The SFR space is mapped into the upper 128 bytes of internal  
data memory space and accessed by direct addressing only. It  
provides an interface between the CPU and all on-chip periph-  
erals. A block diagram showing the programming model of the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 via the SFR area is shown in  
Figure 11.  
All registers except the program counter (PC) and the four  
general-purpose register banks reside in the SFR area. The SFR  
registers include control, configuration, and data registers that  
provide an interface between the CPU and all on-chip peripherals.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 supports dual data  
pointers. See the Dual Data Pointers section.  
Stack Pointer (SP and SPH)  
The SP SFR is the stack pointer, which is used to hold an  
internal RAM address called the top of the stack. The SP register  
is incremented before data is stored during PUSH and CALL  
executions. Although the stack can reside anywhere in on-chip  
RAM, the SP register is initialized to 07H after a reset. This  
causes the stack to begin at location 08H.  
62-kBYTE  
ELECTRICALLY  
REPROGRAMMABLE  
NONVOLATILE  
4-kBYTE  
ELECTRICALLY  
REPROGRAMMABLE  
NONVOLATILE  
FLASH/EE PROGRAM  
FLASH/EE DATA  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
128-BYTE  
SPECIAL  
FUNCTION  
REGISTER  
AREA  
8051  
COMPATIBLE  
CORE  
As mentioned earlier, the parts offer an extended 11-bit stack  
pointer. The 3 extra bits needed to make up the 11-bit stack  
pointer are the 3 LSBs of the SPH byte located at B7H. To enable  
the SPH SFR, the EXSP (CFG84x.7) bit must be set; otherwise,  
the SPH SFR can be neither written to nor read from.  
Σ-ADC  
OTHER ON-CHIP  
PERIPHERALS  
TEMPERATURE  
SENSOR  
CURRENT SOURCES  
12-BIT DAC  
SERIAL I/O  
WDT  
256 BYTES RAM  
2kBYTES XRAM  
Program Status Word (PSW)  
The PSW SFR contains several bits that reflect the current  
status of the CPU as listed in Table 5.  
PSM  
TIC  
PWM  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D0H  
00H  
Yes  
Figure 11. Programming Model  
Accumulator SFR (ACC)  
ACC is the accumulator register, which is used for math opera-  
tions including addition, subtraction, integer multiplication and  
division, and Boolean bit manipulations. The mnemonics for  
accumulator-specific instructions usually refer to the accumulator  
as A.  
Table 5. PSW SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
CY  
Carry Flag.  
6
5
AC  
F0  
Auxiliary Carry Flag.  
General-Purpose Flag.  
B SFR (B)  
The B register is used with the accumulator for multiplication  
and division operations. For other instructions, it can be treated  
as a general-purpose scratch pad register.  
4, 3  
RS1, RS0 Register Bank Select Bits.  
RS1 RS0 Selected Bank  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
2
1
0
OV  
F1  
P
Overflow Flag.  
General-Purpose Flag.  
Parity Bit.  
Rev. A | Page 24 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Power Control Register (PCON)  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 Configuration Register  
(CFG845/CFG847/CFG848)  
The PCON SFR contains bits for power-saving options and  
general-purpose status flags as listed in Table 6.  
The CFG845/CFG847/CFG848 SFR contains the bits necessary  
to configure the internal XRAM and the extended SP. By default,  
it configures the user into 8051 mode, that is, extended SP, and  
the internal XRAM are disabled. When using in a program, use  
the part name only, that is, CFG845, CFG847, or CFG848.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
87H  
00H  
No  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
AFH  
00H  
No  
Table 6. PCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
SMOD  
Double UART Baud Rate.  
0 = Normal, 1 = Double Baud Rate.  
Table 7. CFG845/CFG847/CFG848 SFR Bit Designations  
6
5
SERIPD Serial Power-Down Interrupt Enable. If this  
bit is set, a serial interrupt from either SPI  
or I2C can terminate the power-down  
mode.  
INT0PD INT0 Power-Down Interrupt Enable.  
If this bit is set, either a level (IT0 = 0) or a  
negative-going transition (IT0 = 1) on the  
INT0 pin terminates power-down mode.  
ALEOFF If set to 1, the ALE output is disabled.  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
EXSP  
Extended SP Enable.  
If this bit is set to 1, the stack rolls over  
from SPH/SP = 00FFH to 0100H.  
If this bit is cleared to 0, SPH SFR is  
disabled and the stack rolls over from  
SP = FFH to SP = 00H.  
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.,  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
GF1  
GF0  
PD  
General-Purpose Flag Bit.  
General-Purpose Flag Bit.  
Power-Down Mode Enable. If set to 1, the  
part enters power-down mode.  
0
-----  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
XRAMEN If this bit is set to 1, the internal XRAM is  
mapped into the lower 2 kbytes of the  
external address space.  
If this bit is cleared to 0, the internal XRAM  
is accessible and up to 16 MB of external  
data memory become available. See  
Figure 8.  
Rev. A | Page 25 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
capacitor (10 nF to 100 nF) be placed on the input to the ADC  
(usually as part of an antialiasing filter) to aid in noise  
performance.  
ADC CIRCUIT INFORMATION  
The ADuC845 incorporates two 10-channel (8-channel on the  
MQFP package) 24-bit Σ-∆ ADCs, while the ADuC847 and  
ADuC848 each incorporate a single 10-channel (8-channel on  
the MQFP package) 24-bit and 16-bit Σ-∆ ADC.  
The input channels are intended to convert signals directly from  
sensors without the need for external signal conditioning. With  
internal buffering disabled (relevant bits set/cleared in  
ADC0CON1), external buffering might be required.  
Each part also includes an on-chip programmable gain  
amplifier and configurable buffering (neither is available on the  
auxiliary ADC on the ADuC845). The parts also incorporate  
digital filtering intended for measuring wide dynamic range and  
low frequency signals such as those in weigh-scale, strain-gage,  
pressure transducer, or temperature measurement applications.  
When the internal buffer is enabled, it might be necessary to  
offset the negative input channel by +100 mV and to offset the  
positive channel by −100 mV if the reference range is AVDD  
.
This accounts for the restricted common-mode input range in  
the buffer. Some circuits, for example, bridge circuits, are  
inherently suitable to use without having to offset where the  
output voltage is balanced around VREF/2 and is not sufficiently  
large to encroach on the supply rails. Internal buffering is not  
available on the auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 only). The auxiliary  
ADC (ADuC845 only) is fixed at a gain range of 2.50 V.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 can be configured as four  
or five (MQFP/LFCSP package) fully-differential input channels  
or as eight or ten (MQFP/LFCSP package) pseudo differential  
input channels referenced to AINCOM. The ADC on each part  
(primary only on the ADuC845) can be fully buffered internally,  
and can be programmed for one of eight input ranges from  
20 mV to 2.56 V (VREF × 1.024). Buffering the input channel  
means that the part can handle significant source impedances  
on the selected analog input and that RC filtering (for noise  
rejection or RFI reduction) can be placed on the analog inputs.  
It should be noted that if the ADC is used with internal buffering  
disabled (ADC0CON1.7 = 1, ADC0CON1.6 = 0), these un-  
buffered inputs provide a dynamic load to the driving source.  
Therefore, resistor/capacitor combinations on the inputs can  
cause dc gain errors, depending on the output impedance of the  
source that is driving the ADC inputs.  
The ADCs use a Σ-Δ conversion technique to realize up to  
24 bits on the ADuC845 and the ADuC847 and up to 16 bits on  
the ADuC848 of no missing codes performance (20 Hz update  
rate, chop enabled). The Σ-Δ modulator converts the sampled  
input signal into a digital pulse train whose duty cycle contains  
the digital information. A sinc3 programmable low-pass filter  
(see Table 28) is then used to decimate the modulator output  
data stream to give a valid data conversion result at program-  
mable output rates. The signal chain has two modes of operation,  
chop enabled and chop disabled. The  
bit in the  
CHOP  
ADCMODE register enables or disables the chopping scheme.  
Table 8 and Table 9 show the allowable external resistance/  
capacitance values for unbuffered mode such that no gain error  
at the 16-bit and 20-bit levels, respectively, is introduced. When  
used with internal buffering enabled, it is recommended that a  
Table 8. Maximum Resistance for No 16-Bit Gain Error (Unbuffered Mode)  
External Capacitance  
Gain  
0 pF  
50 pF  
100 pF  
16.7 kΩ  
8.1 kΩ  
3.9 kΩ  
1.7 kΩ  
500 pF  
4.5 kΩ  
2.2 kΩ  
1.0 kΩ  
480 Ω  
1000 pF  
2.58 kΩ  
1.26 kΩ  
600 Ω  
5000 pF  
700 Ω  
360 Ω  
170 Ω  
75 Ω  
1
2
4
111.3 kΩ  
53.7 kΩ  
25.4 kΩ  
10.7 kΩ  
27.8 kΩ  
13.5 kΩ  
6.4 kΩ  
2.9 kΩ  
8–128  
270 Ω  
Table 9. Maximum Resistance for No 20-Bit Gain Error (Unbuffered Mode)  
External Capacitance  
Gain  
0 pF  
50 pF  
100 pF  
12.5 kΩ  
6.1 kΩ  
2.9 kΩ  
1.3 k Ω  
500 pF  
3.2 kΩ  
1.6 kΩ  
790 Ω  
370 Ω  
1000 pF  
1.77 kΩ  
880 Ω  
430 Ω  
195 Ω  
5000 pF  
440 Ω  
220 Ω  
110 Ω  
50 Ω  
1
2
4
84.9 kΩ  
42.0 kΩ  
20.5 kΩ  
8.8 kΩ  
21.1 kΩ  
10.4 kΩ  
5.0 kΩ  
2.3 k Ω  
8–128  
Rev. A | Page 26 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Signal Chain Overview (Chop Enabled,  
= 0)  
CHOP  
With chop enabled, the ADC repeatedly reverses its inputs. The  
decimated digital output words from the Sinc3 filter, therefore,  
have a positive offset and a negative offset term included. As a  
result, a final summing stage is included so that each output  
word from the filter is summed and averaged with the previous  
filter output to produce a new valid output result to be written  
to the ADC data register. Programming the Sinc3 decimation  
factor is restricted to an 8-bit register called SF (see Table 28),  
the actual decimation factor is the register value times 8.  
Therefore, the decimated output rate from the Sinc3 filter (and  
the ADC conversion rate) is  
CHOP  
With the  
bit = 0 (see the ADCMODE SFR bit designa-  
tions in Table 24), the chopping scheme is enabled. This is the  
default condition and gives optimum performance in terms of  
offset errors and drift performance. With chop enabled, the  
available output rates vary from 5.35 Hz to 105 Hz (SF = 255  
and 13, respectively). A typical block diagram of the ADC input  
channel with chop enabled is shown in Figure 12.  
The sampling frequency of the modulator loop is many times  
higher than the bandwidth of the input signal. The integrator in  
the modulator shapes the quantization noise (which results  
from the analog-to-digital conversion) so that the noise is pushed  
toward one-half of the modulator frequency. The output of the  
Σ-Δ modulator feeds directly into the digital filter. The digital  
filter then band-limits the response to a frequency significantly  
lower than one-half of the modulator frequency. In this manner,  
the 1-bit output of the comparator is translated into a band  
limited, low noise output from the ADCs.  
1
3
1
fADC  
=
×
× fMOD  
8× SF  
where:  
ADC is the ADC conversion rate.  
f
SF is the decimal equivalent of the word loaded to the filter  
register.  
f
MOD is the modulator sampling rate of 32.768 kHz.  
The ADC filter is a low-pass Sinc3 or (sinx/x)3 filter whose  
primary function is to remove the quantization noise introduced  
at the modulator. The cutoff frequency and decimated output  
data rate of the filter are programmable via the Sinc filter word  
loaded into the filter (SF) register (see Table 28). The complete  
signal chain is chopped, resulting in excellent dc offset and  
offset drift specifications and is extremely beneficial in applica-  
tions where drift, noise rejection, and optimum EMI rejection  
are important.  
The chop rate of the channel is half the output data rate:  
1
fCHOP  
=
2× fADC  
As shown in the block diagram (Figure 12), the Sinc3 filter  
outputs alternately contain +VOS and −VOS, where VOS is the  
respective channel offset.  
F
F
F
F
F
ADC  
CHOP  
IN  
MOD  
CHOP  
Σ-∆  
2
Σ-∆  
MOD  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
3
XOR  
MUX  
BUF  
PGA  
SINC FILTER  
3 × (8 × SF)  
AIN + V  
AIN – V  
OS  
OS  
Figure 12. Block Diagram of the ADC Input Channel with Chop Enabled  
Rev. A | Page 27 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
This offset is removed by performing a running average of 2.  
This average by 2 means that the settling time to any change in  
programming of the ADC is twice the normal conversion time,  
while an asynchronous step change on the analog input is not  
fully reflected until the third subsequent output. See Figure 13.  
The allowable range for SF (chop enabled) is 13 to 255 with  
a default of 69 (45H). The corresponding conversion rates,  
rms and peak-to-peak noise performances are shown in  
Table 10, Table 11, Table 12, and Table 13. The numbers are  
typical and generated at a differential input voltage of 0 V  
and a common-mode voltage of 2.5 V. Note that the con-  
version time increases by 0.732 ms for each increment in SF.  
2
tSETTLE  
=
= 2×tADC  
fADC  
SYNCHRONOUS CHANGE  
(I.E. CHANNEL CHANGE)  
SAMPLE 1  
SAMPLE 2  
SAMPLE 3  
SAMPLE 4  
SAMPLE 5  
SAMPLE 6  
NO/INVALID  
OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 3 + SAMPLE 4  
2
SAMPLE 1 + SAMPLE 2  
2
NO OUTPUT  
VALID OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 2 + SAMPLE 3  
SAMPLE 4 + SAMPLE 5  
2
2
VALID OUTPUT  
VALID OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 5 + SAMPLE 6  
2
VALID OUTPUT  
Figure 13. ADC Settling Time Following a Synchronous Change with  
Chop Enabled  
ASYNCHRONOUS CHANGE  
(I.E. DISCONTINUOUS INPUT CHANGE)  
SAMPLE 1  
SAMPLE 2  
SAMPLE 3  
SAMPLE 4  
SAMPLE 5  
SAMPLE 6  
NO OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 3 + SAMPLE 4  
2
SAMPLE 1 + SAMPLE 2  
2
UNSETTLED OUTPUT  
VALID OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 2 + SAMPLE 3  
SAMPLE 4 + SAMPLE 5  
2
2
VALID OUTPUT  
UNSETTLED OUTPUT  
SAMPLE 5 + SAMPLE 6  
2
VALID OUTPUT  
Figure 14. ADC Settling Time Following an Asynchronous Change with  
Chop Enabled  
Rev. A | Page 28 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADC Noise Performance with Chop Enabled (  
= 0)  
CHOP  
used in the implementation of the modulator. The second  
source is quantization noise, which is added when the analog  
input is converted to the digital domain. The device noise is at a  
low level and is independent of frequency. The quantization  
noise starts at an even lower level but rises rapidly with increasing  
frequency to become the dominant noise source.  
Table 10, Table 11, Table 12, and Table 13 show the output rms  
noise and output peak-to-peak resolution in bits (rounded to  
the nearest 0.5 LSB) for some typical output update rates for the  
ADuC845, ADuC847, and ADuC848. The numbers are typical  
and are generated at a differential input voltage of 0 V and a  
common-mode voltage of 2.5 V. The output update rate is  
selected via the SF7 to SF0 bits in the SF filter register. It is  
important to note that the peak-to-peak resolution figures  
represent the resolution for which there is no code flicker  
within a 6-sigma limit.  
The numbers in the tables are given for the bipolar input ranges.  
For the unipolar ranges, the rms noise numbers are in the same  
range as the bipolar figures, but the peak-to-peak resolution is  
based on half the signal range, which effectively means losing  
1 bit of resolution.  
The output noise comes from two sources. The first source is  
the electrical noise in the semiconductor devices (device noise)  
Table 10. ADuC845 and ADuC847 Typical Output RMS Noise (µV) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Enabled  
Input Range  
SF Word  
13  
23  
27  
69  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
20 mV  
1.75  
1.25  
1.0  
0.63  
0.31  
40 mV  
1.30  
0.95  
1.0  
0.68  
0.38  
80 mV  
1.65  
1.08  
0.85  
0.52  
0.34  
160 mV  
1.5  
0.94  
0.85  
0.7  
320 mV  
2.1  
1.0  
1.13  
0.61  
0.4  
640 mV  
3.1  
1.87  
1.56  
1.1  
1.28 V  
7.15  
3.24  
2.9  
1.3  
0.68  
2.56 V  
13.3  
7.1  
3.6  
2.75  
1.22  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
255  
0.32  
0.45  
Table 11. ADuC845 and ADuC847 Typical Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Enabled  
Input Range  
SF Word  
13  
23  
27  
69  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
20 mV  
12  
12  
12.5  
13  
14.5  
40 mV  
13  
13.5  
13.5  
14  
80 mV  
14  
14.5  
15  
15.5  
16  
160 mV  
15  
15.5  
16  
16  
17  
320 mV  
15.5  
16.5  
16.5  
17.5  
18  
640 mV  
16  
16.5  
17  
17.5  
18.5  
1.28 V  
16  
17  
17  
18  
19  
2.56 V  
16  
16.5  
17.5  
18  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
255  
15  
19.5  
Table 12. ADuC848 Typical Output Noise (µV) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Enabled  
Input Range  
SF Word  
13  
23  
27  
69  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
20 mV  
1.75  
1.25  
1.0  
0.63  
0.31  
40 mV  
1.30  
0.95  
1.0  
0.68  
0.38  
80 mV  
1.65  
1.08  
0.85  
0.52  
0.34  
160 mV  
1.5  
0.94  
0.85  
0.7  
320 mV  
2.1  
1.0  
1.13  
0.61  
0.4  
640 mV  
3.1  
1.87  
1.56  
1.1  
1.28 V  
2.56 V  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
7.15  
3.24  
2.9  
1.3  
0.68  
13.3  
7.1  
3.6  
2.75  
1.22  
255  
0.32  
0.45  
Table 13. ADuC848 Typical Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Enabled  
Input Range  
SF Word  
13  
23  
27  
69  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
20 mV  
12  
12  
12.5  
13  
14.5  
40 mV  
13  
13.5  
13.5  
14  
80 mV  
14  
14.5  
15  
15.5  
16  
160 mV  
15  
15.5  
16  
16  
16  
320 mV  
15.5  
16  
16  
16  
16  
640 mV  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
1.28 V  
2.56 V  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
16  
17  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
255  
15  
Rev. A | Page 29 of 108  
 
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Signal Chain Overview with Chop Disabled (  
= 1)  
CHOP  
The settling time to a step input is governed by the digital filter.  
A synchronized step change requires a settling time of three  
times the programmed update rate; a channel change can be  
treated as a synchronized step change. This is one conversion  
longer than the case for chop enabled. However, because the  
ADC throughput is three times faster with chop disabled than it  
is with chop enabled, the actual time to a settled ADC output is  
significantly less also. This means that following a synchronized  
step change, the ADC requires three conversions (note: data is  
not output following a synchronized ADC change until data has  
settled) before the result accurately reflects the new input  
voltage.  
With  
= 1, chop is disabled and the available output rates  
CHOP  
vary from 16.06 Hz to 1.365 kHz. The range of applicable SF  
words is from 3 to 255. When switching between channels with  
chop disabled, the channel throughput rate is higher than when  
chop is enabled. The drawback with chop disabled is that the  
drift performance is degraded and offset calibration is required  
following a gain range change or significant temperature  
change. A block diagram of the ADC input channel with chop  
disabled is shown in Figure 15.  
The signal chain includes a multiplex or buffer, PGA, Σ-Δ  
modulator, and digital filter. The modulator bit stream is applied  
to a Sinc3 filter. Programming the Sinc3 decimation factor is  
restricted to an 8-bit register SF; the actual decimation factor is  
the register value times 8. The decimated output rate from the  
Sinc3 filter (and the ADC conversion rate) is therefore  
3
tSETTLE  
=
= 3×tADC  
fADC  
An unsynchronized step change requires four conversions to  
accurately reflect the new analog input at its output. Note that  
with an unsynchronized change the ADC continues to output  
data and so the user must take unsettled outputs into account.  
Again, this is one conversion longer than with chop enabled, but  
because the ADC throughput with chop disabled is faster than  
with chop enabled, the actual time taken to obtain a settled  
ADC output is less.  
1
fADC  
=
× fMOD  
8× SF  
where:  
ADC is the ADC conversion rate.  
f
SF is the decimal equivalent of the word loaded to the filter  
register, valid range is from 3 to 255.  
f
MOD is the modulator sampling rate of 32.768 kHz.  
The allowable range for SF is 3 to 255 with a default of 69 (45H).  
The corresponding conversion rates, rms, and peak-to-peak  
noise performances are shown in Table 14, Table 15, Table 16,  
and Table 17. Note that the conversion time increases by 0.244 ms  
for each increment in SF.  
F
F
F
ADC  
IN  
MOD  
Σ-∆  
MOD  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
3
MUX  
BUF  
PGA  
SINC FILTER  
8 × SF  
Figure 15. Block Diagram of ADC Input Channel with Chop Disabled  
Rev. A | Page 30 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADC Noise Performance with Chop Disabled (  
= 1)  
CHOP  
source is quantization noise, which is added when the analog  
input is converted to the digital domain. The device noise is at a  
low level and is independent of frequency. The quantization  
noise starts at an even lower level but rises rapidly with increasing  
frequency to become the dominant noise source.  
Table 14, Table 15, Table 16, and Table 17 show the output rms  
noise and output peak-to-peak resolution in bits (rounded to  
the nearest 0.5 LSB) for some typical output update rates. The  
numbers are typical and are generated at a differential input  
voltage of 0 V and a common-mode voltage of 2.5 V. The output  
update rate is selected via the SF7 to SF0 bits in the SF filter  
register. Note that the peak-to-peak resolution figures represent  
the resolution for which there is no code flicker within a 6-  
sigma limit.  
The numbers in the tables are given for the bipolar input ranges.  
For the unipolar ranges, the rms noise numbers are the same as  
the bipolar range, but the peak-to-peak resolution is based on  
half the signal range, which effectively means losing 1 bit of  
resolution. Typically, the performance of the ADC with chop  
disabled shows a 0.5 LSB degradation over the performance  
with chop enabled.  
The output noise comes from two sources. The first source is  
the electrical noise in the semiconductor devices (device noise)  
used in the implementation of the modulator. The second  
Table 14. ADuC845 and ADuC847 Typical Output RMS Noise (µV) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
Input Range  
Data Update  
SF Word  
Rate (Hz)  
1365.33  
315.08  
59.36  
±20 mV  
30.64  
2.07  
±40 mV  
24.5  
1.95  
0.79  
±80 mV  
56.18  
2.28  
±160 mV  
100.47  
3.24  
±320 mV  
248.39  
8.22  
±640 mV  
468.65  
13.9  
±1.28 V  
774.36  
20.98  
2.3  
±2.56 V  
1739.5  
49.26  
3.7  
3
13  
68  
82  
255  
0.85  
1.01  
0.99  
0.79  
1.29  
49.95  
0.83  
0.77  
0.85  
0.77  
0.91  
1.12  
1.59  
3.2  
16.06  
0.52  
0.58  
0.59  
0.48  
0.52  
0.57  
1.16  
1.68  
Table 15. ADuC845 and ADuC847 Typical Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
Input Range  
Data Update  
SF Word  
Rate (Hz)  
1365.33  
315.08  
59.36  
±20 mV  
7.5  
11.5  
13  
13  
±40 mV  
9
12.5  
14  
14  
±80 mV  
9
13.5  
14.5  
15  
±160 mV  
9
14  
15.5  
16  
±320 mV  
9
13.5  
17  
16.5  
17.5  
±640 mV  
9
±1.28 V  
9
±2.56 V  
9
3
13  
68  
82  
255  
14  
17  
17.5  
18.5  
14  
17.5  
18  
14  
18  
18  
19  
49.95  
16.06  
13.5  
14.5  
15.5  
16.5  
18.5  
Table 16. ADuC848 Typical Output RMS Noise (µV) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
Input Range  
Data Update  
SF Word  
Rate (Hz)  
1365.33  
315.08  
59.36  
±20 mV  
30.64  
2.07  
±40 mV  
24.5  
1.95  
0.79  
±80 mV  
56.18  
2.28  
±160 mV  
100.47  
3.24  
±320 mV  
248.39  
8.22  
±640 mV  
468.65  
13.9  
±1.28 V  
774.36  
20.98  
2.3  
±2.56 V  
1739.5  
49.26  
3.7  
3
13  
69  
82  
255  
0.85  
1.01  
0.99  
0.79  
1.29  
49.95  
0.83  
0.77  
0.85  
0.77  
0.91  
1.12  
1.59  
3.2  
16.06  
0.52  
0.58  
0.59  
0.48  
0.52  
0.57  
1.16  
1.68  
Table 17. ADuC848 Typical Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs. Input Range and Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
Input Range  
160 mV 320mV  
Data Update Rate  
SF Word (Hz)  
20 mV  
7.5  
40 mV  
80 mV  
640mV  
1.28 V  
2.56 V  
3
1365.33  
315.08  
59.36  
9
12.5  
14  
9
9
9
13.5  
16  
9
9
9
13  
68  
82  
255  
11.5  
13  
13.5  
14.5  
15  
14  
15.5  
16  
16  
14  
16  
16  
16  
14  
16  
16  
16  
14  
16  
16  
16  
49.95  
13  
14  
16  
16.06  
13.5  
14.5  
15.5  
16  
Rev. A | Page 31 of 108  
 
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
When an external reference voltage is used, the primary ADC  
sees this internally as a 2.56 V reference (VREF × 1.024).  
Therefore, any calculations of LSB size should account for this.  
For instance, with a 2.5 V external reference connected and  
using a gain of 1 on a unipolar range (2.56 V), the LSB size is  
(2.56/224) = 152.6 nV (if using the 24-bit ADC on the ADuC845  
or ADuC847). If a bipolar gain of 4 is used ( 640 mV), the LSB  
size is ( 640 mV)/224) = 76.3 nV (again using the 24-bit ADC  
on the ADuC845 or ADuC847).  
AUXILIARY ADC (ADUC845 ONLY)  
Table 18. ADuC845 Typical Output RMS Noise (µV) vs.  
Update Rate with Chop Enabled  
SF Word  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
µV  
13  
23  
27  
69  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
17.46  
3.13  
4.56  
2.66  
1.13  
255  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 can also be configured to  
use the on-chip band gap reference via the XREF0/1 bits in the  
ADC0CON2 SFR (for primary ADC) or the AXREF bit in  
ADC1CON (for auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 only)). In this mode  
of operation, the ADC sees the internal reference of 1.25 V,  
thereby halving all the input ranges. A consequence of using the  
internal band gap reference is a noticeable degradation in peak-  
to-peak resolution. For this reason, operation with an external  
reference is recommended.  
Table 19. ADuC845 Typical Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs.  
Update Rate1 with Chop Enabled  
SF Word  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
Bits  
15.5  
18  
13  
23  
105.03  
59.36  
50.56  
19.79  
5.35  
27  
69  
17.5  
18  
255  
19.5  
1 ADC converting in bipolar mode.  
In applications where the excitation (voltage or current) for the  
transducer on the analog input also drives the reference inputs  
for the part, the effect of any low frequency noise in the  
excitation source is removed because the application is ratio-  
metric. If the parts are not used in a ratiometric configuration, a  
low noise reference should be used. Recommended reference  
voltage sources for the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 include  
ADR421, REF43, and REF192.  
Table 20. ADuC845 Typical Output RMS Noise (µV) vs.  
Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
SF Word  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
µV  
3
1365.33  
315.08  
62.06  
59.36  
50.57  
1386.58  
34.94  
3.2  
3.19  
3.14  
1.71  
13  
66  
69  
81  
255  
The reference inputs provide a high impedance, dynamic load  
to external connections. Because the impedance of each reference  
input is dynamic, resistor/capacitor combinations on these pins  
can cause dc gain errors, depending on the output impedance of  
the source that is driving the reference inputs. Reference voltage  
sources, such as those mentioned above, for example, the ADR421,  
typically have low output impedances, and, therefore, decoupling  
capacitors on the REFIN or REFIN2 inputs would be recom-  
mended (typically 0.1 µF). Deriving the reference voltage from  
an external resistor configuration means that the reference input  
sees a significant external source impedance. External decoupling  
of the REFIN and/or REFIN2 inputs is not recommended in  
this type of configuration.  
16.06  
Table 21. ADuC845 Peak-to-Peak Resolution (Bits) vs.  
Update Rate with Chop Disabled  
SF Word  
Data Update Rate (Hz)  
Bits  
3
1365.33  
315.08  
62.06  
59.36  
50.57  
9
14.5  
18  
18  
18  
13  
66  
69  
81  
255  
16.06  
19  
BURNOUT CURRENT SOURCES  
The primary ADC on the ADuC845 and the ADC on the  
ADuC847 and ADuC848 incorporate two 200 µA constant  
current generators, one sourcing current from the AVDD to  
AIN(+), and one sinking current from AIN() to AGND. These  
currents are only configurable for use on AIN4 to AIN5 and/or  
AIN6 to AIN7 in differential mode only, from the ICON.6 bit in  
the ICON SFR (see Table 30). These burnout current sources are  
also available only with buffering enabled via the BUF0/BUF1 bits  
in the ADC0CON1 SFR. Once the burnout currents are turned  
on, a current flows in the external transducer circuit, and a  
measurement of the input voltage on the analog input channel  
REFERENCE INPUTS  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 each have two separate  
differential reference inputs, REFIN and REFIN2 . While both  
references are available for use with the primary ADC, only  
REFIN is available for the auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 only).  
The common-mode range for these differential references is  
from AGND to AVDD. The nominal external reference voltage is  
2.5 V, with the primary and auxiliary (ADuC845 only)reference  
select bits configured from the ADC0CON2 and ADC1CON  
(ADuC845 only), respectively.  
Rev. A | Page 32 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
can be taken. When the resulting voltage measured is full scale,  
the transducer has gone open circuit. When the voltage measured  
is 0 V, this indicates that the transducer has gone short circuit.  
The current sources work over the normal absolute input  
voltage range specifications.  
ADC clock (modulator rate) of 32.768 kHz. During calibration,  
the current (user-written) value of the SF register is used.  
Σ-MODULATOR  
A Σ-∆ ADC usually consists of two main blocks, an analog  
modulator, and a digital filter. For the ADuC845/ADuC847/  
ADuC848, the analog modulator consists of a difference  
amplifier, an integrator block, a comparator, and a feedback  
DAC as shown in Figure 16.  
REFERENCE DETECT CIRCUIT  
The main and auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADCs can be  
configured to allow the use of the internal band gap reference or  
an external reference that is applied to the REFIN pins by  
means of the XREF0/1 bit in the Control Registers AD0CON2  
and AD1CON (ADuC845 only). A reference detection circuit is  
provided to detect whether a valid voltage is applied to the  
REFIN pins. This feature arose in connection with strain-gage  
sensors in weigh scales where the reference and signal are  
provided via a cable from the remote sensor. It is desirable to  
detect whether the cable is disconnected. If either of the pins is  
floating or if the applied voltage is below a specified threshold, a  
flag (NOXREF) is set in the ADC status register (ADCSTAT),  
conversion results are clamped, and calibration registers are not  
updated if a calibration is in progress.  
DIFFERENCE  
COMPARATOR  
AMP  
HIGH  
FREQUENCY  
BIT STREAM  
TO DIGITAL  
FILTER  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
INTEGRATOR  
DAC  
Figure 16. Σ-∆ Modulor Simplified Block Diagram  
In operation, the analog signal is fed to the difference amplifier  
along with the output from the feedback DAC. The difference  
between these two signals is integrated and fed to the comparator.  
The output from the comparator provides the input to the feed-  
back DAC so the system functions as a negative feedback loop  
that tries to minimize the difference signal. The digital data that  
represents the analog input voltage is contained in the duty  
cycle of the pulse train appearing at the output of the comparator.  
This duty cycle data can be recovered as a data-word by using a  
subsequent digital filter stage. The sampling frequency of the  
modulator loop is many times higher than the bandwidth of the  
input signal. The integrator in the modulator shapes the  
quantization noise (that results from the analog-to-digital  
conversion) so that the noise is pushed toward one-half of the  
modulator frequency.  
Note that the reference detect does not look at REFIN2 pins.  
If, during either an offset or gain calibration, the NOEXREF bit  
becomes active, indicating a incorrect VREF, updating the relevant  
calibration register is inhibited to avoid loading incorrect data  
into these registers, and the appropriate bits in ADCSTAT (ERR0  
or ERR1) are set. If the user needs to verify that a valid  
reference is in place every time a calibration is performed, the  
status of the ERR0 and ERR1 bits should be checked at the end  
of every calibration cycle.  
SINC FILTER REGISTER (SF)  
DIGITAL FILTER  
The number entered into the SF register sets the decimation  
factor of the Sinc3 filter for the ADC. See Table 28 and Table 29.  
The output of the ∑-∆ modulator feeds directly into the digital  
filter. The digital filter then band-limits the response to a  
frequency significantly lower than one-half of the modulator  
frequency. In this manner, the 1-bit output of the comparator is  
translated into a band-limited, low noise output from the part.  
The range of operation of the SF word depends on whether  
ADC chop is on or off. With chop disabled, the minimum SF  
word is 3 and the maximum is 255. This gives an ADC through-  
put rate from 16.06 Hz to 1.365 kHz. With chop enabled, the  
minimum SF word is 13 (all values lower than 13 are clamped  
to 13) and the maximum is 255. This gives an ADC throughput  
rate of from 5.4 Hz to 105 Hz. See the fADC equation in the ADC  
description preceding section.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 filter is a low-pass, Sinc3 or  
[(SINx)/x]3 filter whose primary function is to remove the  
quantization noise introduced at the modulator. The cutoff  
frequency and decimated output data rate of the filter are  
programmable via the SF (Sinc filter) SFR as listed in Table 28  
and Table 29.  
An additional feature of the Sinc3 filter is a second notch filter  
positioned in the frequency response at 60 Hz. This gives  
simultaneous 60 Hz rejection to whatever notch is defined by  
the SF filter. This 60 Hz filter is enabled via the REJ60 bit in the  
ADCMODE register (ADCMODE.6). The notch is valid only  
for SF words ≥ 68; otherwise, ADC errors occur, and, in fact, the  
notch is best used with an SF word of 82d giving simultaneous  
50 Hz and 60 Hz rejection. This function is useful only with an  
Figure 22, Figure 23, Figure 24, and Figure 25 show the frequency  
response of the ADC, yielding an overall output rate of 16.6 Hz  
with chop enabled and 50 Hz with chop disabled. Also detailed  
in these plots is the effect of the fixed 60 Hz drop-in notch filter  
(REJ60 bit, ADCMODE.6). This fixed filter can be enabled or  
disabled by setting or clearing the REJ60 bit in the ADCMODE  
register (ADCMODE.6). This 60 Hz drop-in notch filter can be  
Rev. A | Page 33 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
enabled for any SF word that yields an ADC throughput that is  
less than 20 Hz with chop enabled (SF ≥ 68 decimal).  
output for two input conditions: zero-scale and full-scale points.  
These points are derived by performing a conversion on the  
different input voltages (zero-scale and full-scale) provided to the  
input of the modulator during calibration. The result of the  
zero-scale calibration conversion is stored in the offset  
calibration registers for the appropriate ADC. The result of the  
full-scale calibration conversion is stored in the gain calibration  
registers for the appropriate ADC. With these readings, the  
calibration logic can calculate the offset and the gain slope for  
the input-to-output transfer function of the converter.  
ADC CHOPPING  
The ADCs on the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 implement a  
chopping scheme whereby the ADC repeatedly reverses its inputs.  
The decimated digital output words from the Sinc3 filter, there-  
fore, have a positive and negative offset term included. As a  
result, a final summing stage is included in each ADC so that  
each output word from the filter is summed and averaged with  
the previous filter output to produce a new valid output result  
to be written to the ADC data SFRs. The ADC throughput or  
update rate is listed in Table 29. The chopping scheme incor-  
porated into the parts results in excellent dc offset and offset  
drift specifications and is extremely beneficial in applications  
where drift, noise rejection, and optimum EMI performance are  
important. ADC chop can be disabled via the chop bit in the  
ADCMODE SFR (ADCMODE.3). Setting this bit to 1 (logic  
high) disables chop mode.  
During an internal zero-scale or full-scale calibration, the  
respective zero-scale input or full-scale input is automatically  
connected to the ADC inputs internally. A system calibration,  
however, expects the system zero-scale and system full-scale  
voltages to be applied externally to the ADC pins by the user  
before the calibration mode is initiated. In this way, external  
errors are taken into account and minimized. Note that all  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 ADC calibrations are carried  
out at the user-selected SF word update rate. To optimize  
calibration accuracy, it is recommended that the slowest possible  
update rate be used.  
CALIBRATION  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 incorporate four calibration  
modes that can be programmed via the mode bits in the  
ADCMODE SFR detailed in Table 24. Every part is calibrated  
before it leaves the factory. The resulting offset and gain  
calibration coefficients for both the primary and auxiliary  
(ADuC845 only) ADCs are stored on-chip in manufacturing-  
specific Flash/EE memory locations. At power-on or after a  
reset, these factory calibration registers are automatically  
downloaded to the ADC calibration registers in the parts SFR  
space. To facilitate user calibration, each of the primary and  
auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADCs have dedicated calibration  
control SFRs, which are described in the ADC SFR Interface  
section. Once a user initiates a calibration procedure the factory  
calibration values that were initially downloaded during the  
power-on sequence to the ADC calibration SFRs are overwritten.  
The ADC to be calibrated must be enabled via the ADC enable  
bits in the ADCMODE register.  
Internally in the parts, the coefficients are normalized before  
being used to scale the words coming out of the digital filter.  
The offset calibration coefficient is subtracted from the result  
prior to the multiplication by the gain coefficient.  
From an operational point of view, a calibration should be  
treated just like an ordinary ADC conversion. A zero-scale  
calibration (if required) should always be carried out before a  
full-scale calibration. System software should monitor the  
relevant ADC RDY0/1 bit in the ADCSTAT SFR to determine  
the end of calibration by using a polling sequence or an interrupt  
driven routine. If required, the NOEXREF0/1 bits can be moni-  
tored to detect unconnected or low voltage errors in the reference  
during conversion. In the event of the reference becoming  
disconnected, causing a NOXREF flag during a calibration, the  
calibration is immediately halted and no write to the calibration  
SFRs takes place.  
Even though an internal offset calibration mode is described in  
this section, note that the ADCs can be chopped. This chopping  
scheme inherently minimizes offset errors and means that an  
offset calibration should never be required. Also, because  
factory 5 V/25°C gain calibration coefficients are automatically  
present at power-on, an internal full-scale calibration is required  
only if the part is operated at 3 V or at temperatures significantly  
different from 25°C.  
Internal Calibration Example  
With chop enabled, a zero-scale or offset calibration should  
never be required, although a full-scale or offset calibration may  
be required. However, if a full internal calibration is required,  
the procedure should be to select a PGA gain of 1 ( 2.56 V) and  
perform a zero-scale calibration (MD2...0 = 100B in the  
ADCMODE register). Next, select and perform full-scale  
calibration by setting MD2...0 = 101B in the ADCMODE SFR.  
Now select the desired PGA range and perform a zero-scale  
calibration again (MD2..0 = 100B in ADCMODE) at the new  
PGA range. The reason for the double zero-scale calibration is  
that the internal calibration procedure for full-scale calibration  
automatically selects the reference in voltage at PGA = 1.  
Therefore, the full-scale endpoint calibration automatically  
If the part is operated in chop disabled mode, a calibration may  
need to be done with every gain range change that occurs via  
the PGA.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 each offer internal or  
system calibration facilities. For full calibration to occur on the  
selected ADC, the calibration logic must record the modulator  
Rev. A | Page 34 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
subtracts the offset calibration error, it is advisable to perform  
an offset calibration at the same gain range as that used for full-  
scale calibration. There is no penalty to the full-scale calibration  
in redoing the zero-scale calibration at the required PGA range  
because the full-scale calibration has very good matching at all  
the PGA ranges.  
mixed-signal solutions available on the market. The auxiliary  
(ADuC845 only) ADC does not incorporate a PGA, and the  
gain is fixed at 0 V to 2.50 V in unipolar mode, and 2.50 V in  
bipolar mode.  
BIPOLAR/UNIPOLAR CONFIGURATION  
The analog inputs of the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 can  
accept either unipolar or bipolar input voltage ranges. Bipolar  
input ranges do not imply that the part can handle negative  
voltages with respect to system AGND, but rather with respect  
to the negative reference input. Unipolar and bipolar signals on  
the AIN(+) input on the ADC are referenced to the voltage on  
the respective AIN(−) input. AIN(+) and AIN(−) refer to the  
signals seen by the ADC.  
This procedure also applies when chop is disabled.  
Note that for internal calibration to be effective, the AINpin  
should be held at a steady voltage, within the allowable common-  
mode range to keep it from floating during calibration.  
System Calibration Example  
With chop enabled, a system zero-scale or offset calibration  
should never be required. However, if a full-scale or gain  
calibration is required for any reason, use the following typical  
procedure for doing so.  
For example, if AIN(−) is biased to 2.5 V (tied to the external  
reference voltage) and the ADC is configured for a unipolar  
analog input range of 0 mV to > 20 mV, the input voltage range  
on AIN(+) is 2.5 V to 2.52 V. On the other hand, if AIN(−) is  
biased to 2.5 V (again the external reference voltage) and the  
ADC is configured for a bipolar analog input range of 1.28 V,  
the analog input range on the AIN(+) is 1.22 V to 3.78 V, that is,  
2.5 V 1.28 V.  
1. Apply a differential voltage of 0 V to the selected analog  
inputs (AIN+ to AIN−) that are held at a common-mode  
voltage.  
Perform a system zero-scale or offset calibration by setting  
the MD2...0 bits in the ADCMODE register to 110B.  
The modes of operation for the ADC are fully differential mode  
or pseudo differential mode. In fully differential mode, AIN1 to  
AIN2 are one differential pair, AIN3 to AIN4 are another pair  
(AIN5 to AIN6, AIN7 to AIN8, and AIN9 to AIN10 are the  
others). In differential mode, all AIN(−) pin names imply the  
negative analog input of the selected differential pair, that is,  
AIN2, AIN4, AIN6, AIN8, AIN10. The term AIN(+) implies the  
positive input of the selected differential pair, that is, AIN1,  
AIN3, AIN5, AIN7, AIN9. In pseudo differential mode, each  
analog input is paired with the AINCOM pin, which can be  
biased up or tied to AGND. In this mode, the AIN(−) implies  
AINCOM and AIN(+) implies any one of the ten analog input  
channels.  
2. Apply a full-scale differential voltage across the ADC  
inputs again at the same common-mode voltage.  
Perform a system full-scale or gain calibration by setting  
the MD2...0 bits in the ADCMODE register to 111B.  
Perform a system calibration at the required PGA range to be  
used since the ADC scales to the differential voltages that are  
applied to the ADC during the calibration routines.  
In bipolar mode, the zero-scale calibration determines the mid-  
scale point of the ADC (800000H) or 0 V.  
PROGRAMMABLE GAIN AMPLIFIER  
The primary ADC incorporates an on-chip programmable gain  
amplifier (PGA). The PGA can be programmed through eight  
different ranges, which are programmed via the range bits (RN0  
to RN2) in the ADC0CON1 register. With an external 2.5 V  
reference applied, the unipolar ranges are 0 mV to 20 mV, 0 mV  
to 40 mV, 0 mV to 80 mV, 0 mV to 160 mV, 0 mV to 320 mV,  
0 mV to 640 mV, 0 V to 1.28 V and 0 V to 2.56 V, while in  
bipolar mode the ranges are 20 mV, 40 mV, 80 mV, 160 mV,  
320 mV, 64 0 mV, 1.28 V, and 2.56 V. These ranges should  
appear on the input to the on-chip PGA. The ADC range-  
matching specification of 2 µV (typical with chop enabled)  
means that calibration need only be carried out on a single  
range and need not be repeated when the ADC range is  
changed. This is a significant advantage compared to similar  
The configuration of the inputs (unipolar versus bipolar) is  
shown in Figure 17.  
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
AIN6  
AIN7  
AIN8  
AIN9  
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
AIN6  
AIN7  
AIN8  
AIN9  
FULLY DIFFERENTIAL  
FULLY DIFFERENTIAL  
FULLY DIFFERENTIAL  
FULLY DIFFERENTIAL  
FULLY DIFFERENTIAL  
AIN10  
AIN10  
AINCOM  
AINCOM  
Figure 17. Unipolar and Bipolar Channel Pairs  
Rev. A | Page 35 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DATA OUTPUT CODING  
EXCITATION CURRENTS  
When the primary ADC is configured for unipolar operation,  
the output coding is natural (straight) binary with a zero differ-  
ential input voltage resulting in a code of 000...000, a midscale  
voltage resulting in a code of 100...000, and a full-scale voltage  
resulting in a code of 111...111. The output code for any analog  
input voltage on the main ADC can be represented as follows:  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 contain two matched,  
software-configurable 200 µA current sources. Both source  
current from AVDD, which is directed to either or both of the  
IEXC1 (Pin 11 whose alternate functions are P1.6/AIN6) or  
IEXC2 (Pin 12, whose alternate functions are P1.7/AIN7) pins  
on the device. These currents are controlled via the lower four  
bits in the ICON register (Table 30). These bits not only enable  
the current sources but also allow the configuration of the  
currents such that 200 µA can be sourced individually from  
both pins or can be combined to give a 400 µA source from one  
or the other of the outputs. These sources can be used to excite  
external resistive bridge or RTD sensors (see Figure 70).  
Code – (AIN × GAIN × 2N) / (1.024 × VREF  
where:  
AIN is the analog input voltage.  
)
GAIN is the PGA gain setting, that is, 1 on the 2.56 V range and  
128 on the 20 mV range, and N = 24 (16 on the ADuC848).  
ADC POWER-ON  
The output code for any analog input voltage on the auxiliary  
ADC can be represented as follows:  
The ADC typically takes 0.5 ms to power up from an initial  
start-up sequence or following a power-down event.  
Code = (AIN × 2N) / (VREF  
)
with the same definitions as used for the primary ADC above.  
When the primary ADC is configured for bipolar operation, the  
coding is offset binary with negative full-scale voltage resulting  
in a code of 000...000, a zero differential voltage resulting in a  
code of 800…000, and a positive full-scale voltage resulting in a  
code of 111...111. The output from the primary ADC for any  
analog input voltage can be represented as follows:  
Code = 2N−1[(AIN × GAIN) / (1.024 ×VREF) + 1]  
where:  
AIN is the analog input voltage.  
GAIN is the PGA gain, that is, 1 on the 2.56 V range and  
128 on the 20 mV range.  
N = 24 (16 on the ADuC848).  
The output from the auxiliary ADC in bipolar mode can be  
represented as follows:  
Code = 2N−1 [(AIN / VREF) + 1]  
Rev. A | Page 36 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
0
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–110  
–120  
0
10  
20  
30 40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100 110  
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250  
SF (Decimal)  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
Figure 18. Filter Response, Chop On, SF = 69 Decimal  
Figure 21. 60 Hz Normal Mode Rejection vs. SF, Chop On  
10  
–10  
–30  
–10  
–30  
–50  
–70  
–50  
–70  
–90  
–90  
–110  
–110  
–130  
–150  
–130  
–150  
0
10  
20  
30 40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
Figure 19. Filter Response, Chop On, SF = 255 Decimal  
Figure 22. Chop Off, Fadc = 50 Hz, SF = 52H  
0
10  
–10  
–30  
–50  
–70  
–10  
–20  
–30  
–40  
–50  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–190  
–110  
–130  
–150  
–110  
–120  
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250  
SF (Decimal)  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
Figure 20. 50 Hz Normal Mode Rejection vs. SF Word, Chop On  
Figure 23. Chop Off, SF = 52H, REJ60 Enabled  
Rev. A | Page 37 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
0
0
–20  
–20  
–40  
–60  
–80  
–40  
–60  
–80  
–100  
–120  
–100  
–120  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
FREQUENCY (Hz)  
Figure 24. Chop On, Fadc = 16.6 Hz, SF = 52H  
Figure 25. Chop On, Fadc = 16.6 Hz, SF = 52H, REJ60 Enabled  
Rev. A | Page 38 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
ADC SFR INTERFACE  
The ADCs are controlled and configured via a number of SFRs that are mentioned here and described in more detail in the following  
sections.  
Table 22. ADC SFR Interface  
Name  
Description  
ADCSTAT  
ADCMODE  
ADC Status Register. Holds the general status of the primary and auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADCs.  
ADC Mode Register. Controls the general modes of operation for primary and auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADCs.  
ADC0CON1 Primary ADC Control Register 1. Controls the specific configuration of the primary ADC.  
ADC0CON2 Primary ADC Control Register 2. Controls the specific configuration of the primary ADC.  
ADC1CON  
SF  
Auxiliary ADC Control Register. Controls the specific configuration of the auxiliary ADC. ADuC845 only.  
Sinc Filter Register. Configures the decimation factor for the Sinc3 filter and, therefore, the primary and auxiliary (ADuC845  
only) ADC update rates.  
ICON  
Current Source Control Register. Allows user control of the various on-chip current source options.  
ADC0L/M/H Primary ADC 24-bit (16-bit on the ADuC848) conversion result is held in these three 8-bit registers. ADC0L is not available on  
the ADuC848.  
ADC1L/M/H Auxiliary ADC 24-bit conversion result is held in these two 8-bit registers. ADuC845 only.  
OF0L/M/H  
OF1L/H  
Primary ADC 24-bit offset calibration coefficient is held in these three 8-bit registers. OF0L is not available on the ADuC848.  
Auxiliary ADC 16-bit offset calibration coefficient is held in these two 8-bit registers. ADuC845 only.  
GN0L/M/H  
GN1L/H  
Primary ADC 24-bit gain calibration coefficient is held in these three 8-bit registers. GN0L is not available on the ADuC848.  
Auxiliary ADC 16-bit gain calibration coefficient is held in these two 8-bit registers. ADuC845 only.  
Rev. A | Page 39 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADCSTAT (ADC STATUS REGISTER)  
This SFR reflects the status of both ADCs including data ready, calibration, and various (ADC-related) error and warning conditions  
including REFIN reference detect and conversion overflow/underflow flags.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D8H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 23. ADCSTAT SFR Bit Designation  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
RDY0  
Ready Bit for the Primary ADC.  
Set by hardware on completion of conversion or calibration.  
Cleared directly by the user or indirectly by a write to the mode bits to start calibration. The primary ADC is  
inhibited from writing further results to its data or calibration registers until the RDY0 bit is cleared.  
6
5
RDY1  
CAL  
Ready Bit for Auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC.  
Same definition as RDY0 referred to the auxiliary ADC. Valid on the ADuC845 only.  
Calibration Status Bit.  
Set by hardware on completion of calibration.  
Cleared indirectly by a write to the mode bits to start another ADC conversion or calibration.  
Note that calibration with the temperature sensor selected (auxiliary ADC on the ADuC845 only) fails to complete.  
No External Reference Bit (only active if primary or auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC is active).  
Set to indicate that one or both of the REFIN pins is floating or the applied voltage is below a specified threshold.  
When set, conversion results are clamped to all 1s. Only detects invalid REFIN , does not check REFIN2 .  
4
3
NOXREF  
ERR0  
Cleared to indicate valid VREF  
Primary ADC Error Bit.  
.
Set by hardware to indicate that the result written to the primary ADC data registers has been clamped to all 0s or  
all 1s. After a calibration, this bit also flags error conditions that caused the calibration registers not to be written.  
Cleared by a write to the mode bits to initiate a conversion or calibration.  
Auxiliary ADC Error Bit. Same definition as ERR0 referred to the auxiliary ADC. Valid on the ADuC845 only.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
2
1
0
ERR1  
–––  
–––  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Rev. A | Page 40 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADCMODE (ADC MODE REGISTER)  
Used to control the operational mode of both ADCs.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D1H  
08H  
No  
Table 24. ADCMODE SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
–––  
REJ60  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Automatic 60 Hz Notch Select Bit.  
Setting this bit places a notch in the frequency response at 60 Hz, allowing simultaneous 50 Hz and 60 Hz  
rejection at an SF word of 82 decimal. This 60 Hz notch can be set only if SF ≥ 68 decimal, that is, the regular  
filter notch must be ≤ 60 Hz. This second notch is placed at 60 Hz only if the device clock is at 32.768 kHz.  
5
4
ADC0EN  
Primary ADC Enable.  
Set by the user to enable the primary ADC and place it in the mode selected in MD2–MD0 below.  
Cleared by the user to place the primary ADC into power-down mode.  
Auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC Enable.  
ADC1EN  
(ADuC845 only)  
Set by the user to enable the auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC and place it in the mode selected in MD2–MD0  
below.  
Cleared by the user to place the auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC in power-down mode.  
Chop Mode Disable.  
3
CHOP  
Set by the user to disable chop mode on both the primary and auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC allowing a  
three times higher ADC data throughput. SF values as low as 3 are allowed with this bit set, giving up to  
1.3 kHz ADC update rates.  
Cleared by the user to enable chop mode on both the primary and auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC.  
Primary and Auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC Mode Bits.  
2, 1, 0  
MD2, MD1, MD0  
These bits select the operational mode of the enabled ADC as follows:  
MD2 MD1 MD0  
0
0
0
0
0
1
ADC Power-Down Mode (Power-On Default).  
Idle Mode. In idle mode, the ADC filter and modulator are held in a reset state  
although the modulator clocks are still provided.  
0
1
0
Single Conversion Mode. In single conversion mode, a single conversion is performed  
on the enabled ADC. Upon completion of a conversion, the ADC data registers  
(ADC0H/M/L and/or ADC1H/M/L (ADuC845 only)) are updated. The relevant flags in  
the ADCSTAT SFR are written, and power-down is re-entered with the MD2−MD0  
accordingly being written to 000.  
Note that ADC0L is not available on the ADuC848.  
0
1
1
Continuous Conversion. In continuous conversion mode, the ADC data registers are  
regularly updated at the selected update rate (see the Sinc Filter SFR Bit Designations  
in Table 28).  
1
1
0
0
0
1
Internal Zero-Scale Calibration. Internal short automatically connected to the  
enabled ADC input(s).  
Internal Full-Scale Calibration. Internal or external REFIN or REFIN2 VREF (as  
determined by XREF bits in ADC0CON2 and/or AXREF (ADuC845 only) in ADC1CON  
(ADuC845 only) is automatically connected to the enabled ADC input(s) for this  
calibration.  
1
1
1
1
0
1
System Zero-Scale Calibration. User should connect system zero-scale input to the  
enabled ADC input(s) as selected by CH3–CH0 and ACH3–ACH0 bits in the  
ADC0CON2 and ADC1CON (ADuC845 only) registers.  
System Full-Scale Calibration. User should connect system full-scale input to the  
enabled ADC input(s) as selected by CH3–CH0 and ACH3–ACH0 bits in the  
ADC0CON2 and ADC1CON (ADuC845 only) registers.  
Rev. A | Page 41 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Notes on the ADCMODE Register  
Any change to the MD bits immediately resets both ADCs  
(auxiliary ADC only applicable to the ADuC845). A write  
to the MD2–MD0 bits with no change in contents is also  
treated as a reset. (See the exception to this in the third  
note of this section.)  
If the parts are powered down via the PD bit in the PCON  
register, the current ADCMODE bits are preserved, that is,  
they are not reset to default state. Upon a subsequent  
resumption of normal operating mode, the ADCs restarts  
the selected operation defined by the ADCMODE register.  
If ADC0CON is written when ADC0EN = 1, or if  
ADC0EN is changed from 0 to 1, both ADCs are also  
immediately reset. In other words, the primary ADC is  
given priority over the auxiliary ADC and any change  
requested on the primary ADC is immediately responded  
to. Only applicable to the ADuC845.  
Once ADCMODE has been written with a calibration  
mode, the RDY0/1 (ADuC845 only) bits (ADCSTAT) are  
reset and the calibration commences. On completion, the  
appropriate calibration registers are written, the relevant  
bits in ADCSTAT are written, and the MD2–MD0 bits are  
reset to 000b to indicate that the ADC is back in power-  
down mode.  
On the other hand, if ADC1CON is written to or if  
ADC1EN is changed from 0 to 1, only the auxiliary ADC is  
reset. For example, if the primary ADC is continuously  
converting when the auxiliary ADC change or enable  
occurs, the primary ADC continues undisturbed. Rather  
than allow the auxiliary ADC to operate with a phase  
difference from the primary ADC, the auxiliary ADC falls  
into step with the outputs of the primary ADC. The result  
is that the first conversion time for the auxiliary ADC is  
delayed by up to three outputs while the auxiliary ADC  
update rate is synchronized to the primary ADC. Only  
applicable to ADuC845. If the ADC1CON write occurs  
after the primary ADC has completed its operation, the  
auxiliary ADC can respond immediately without having to  
fall into step with the primary ADCs output cycle.  
Any calibration request of the auxiliary ADC while the  
temperature sensor is selected fails to complete. Although  
the RDY1 bit is set at the end of the calibration cycle, no  
update of the calibration SFRs takes place, and the ERR1  
bit is set. ADuC845 only.  
Calibrations performed at maximum SF (see Table 28)  
value (slowest ADC throughput rate) help to ensure  
optimum calibration.  
The duration of a calibration cycle is 2/Fadc for chop-on  
mode and 4/Fadc for chop-off mode.  
Rev. A | Page 42 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADC0CON1 (PRIMARY ADC CONTROL REGISTER)  
ADC0CON1 is used to configure the primary ADC for buffer, unipolar, or bipolar coding, and ADC range configuration.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D2H  
07H  
No  
Table 25. ADC0CON1 SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7, 6  
BUF1, BUF0  
Buffer Configuration Bits.  
BUF1 BUF0  
Buffer Configuration  
ADC0+ and ADC0− are buffered  
Reserved  
Buffer Bypass  
Reserved  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5
UNI  
Primary ADC Unipolar Bit.  
Set by the user to enable unipolar coding; zero differential input results in 000000H output.  
Cleared by the user to enable bipolar coding; zero differential input results in 800000H output.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
4
–––  
3
–––  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
2, 1, 0  
RN2, RN1, RN0  
Primary ADC Range Bits. Written by the user to select the primary ADC input range as follows:  
RN2  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
RN1  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
RN0  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Selected primary ADC input range (VREF = 2.5 V)  
20 mV (0 mV–20 mV in unipolar mode)  
40 mV (0 mV–40 mV in unipolar mode)  
80 mV (0 mV–80 mV in unipolar mode)  
160 mV (0 mV–160 mV in unipolar mode)  
320 mV (0 mV–320 mV in unipolar mode)  
640 mV (0 mV–640 mV in unipolar mode)  
1.28 V (0 V–1.28 V in unipolar mode)  
1
1
1
2.56 V (0 V–2.56 V in unipolar mode)  
Rev. A | Page 43 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADC0CON2 (PRIMARY ADC CHANNEL SELECT REGISTER)  
ADC0CON2 is used to select a reference source and channel for the primary ADC.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
E6H  
00H  
No  
Table 26. ADC0CON2 SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7, 6  
XREF1, XREF0  
Primary ADC External Reference Select Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the primary ADC to use the external reference via REFIN or REFIN2 .  
Cleared by the user to enable the primary ADC to use the internal band gap reference (VREF = 1.25 V).  
XREF1 XREF0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Internal 1.25 V Reference.  
REFIN Selected.  
REFIN2 (AIN3/AIN4) Selected.  
Reserved.  
5
4
–––  
–––  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
3, 2, 1, 0 CH3, CH2, CH1, CH0  
Primary ADC Channel Select Bits. Written by the user to select the primary ADC channel as follows:  
CH3 CH2  
CH1  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
CH0 Selected Primary ADC Input Channel.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
AIN1–AINCOM  
AIN2–AINCOM  
AIN3–AINCOM  
AIN4–AINCOM  
AIN5–AINCOM  
AIN6–AINCOM  
AIN7–AINCOM  
AIN8–AINCOM  
AIN9–AINCOM (CSP package only; not a valid selection on the MQFP package)  
AIN10–AINCOM (CSP package only; not a valid selection on the MQFP package)  
AIN1–AIN2  
AIN3–AIN4  
AIN5–AIN6  
AIN7–AIN8  
AIN9–AIN10 (CSP package only; not a valid selection on the MQFP package)  
AINCOM–AINCOM  
Note that because the reference-detect does not operate on the REFIN2 pair, the REFIN2 pins can go below 1 V.  
Rev. A | Page 44 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ADC1CON (AUXILIARY ADC CONTROL REGISTER) (ADuC845 ONLY)  
ADC1CON is used to configure the auxiliary ADC for reference, channel selection, and unipolar or bipolar coding. The auxiliary ADC is  
available only on the ADuC845.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D3H  
00H  
No  
Table 27. ADC1CON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
–––  
AXREF  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC External Reference Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the auxiliary ADC to use the external reference via REFIN .  
Cleared by the user to enable the auxiliary ADC to use the internal band gap reference.  
Auxiliary ADC cannot use the REFIN2 reference inputs.  
5
AUNI  
Auxiliary (ADuC845 only) ADC Unipolar Bit.  
Set by the user to enable unipolar coding, that is, zero input results in 000000H output.  
Cleared by the user to enable bipolar coding, zero input results in 800000H output.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
4
–––  
3, 2, 1, 0  
ACH3, ACH2, ACH1, ACH0  
Auxiliary ADC Channel Select Bits. Written by the user to select the auxiliary ADC channel.  
ACH3 ACH2 ACH1 ACH0 Selected Auxiliary ADC Input Range (VREF = 2.5 V).  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
AIN1–AINCOM  
AIN2–AINCOM  
AIN3–AINCOM  
AIN4–AINCOM  
AIN5–AINCOM  
AIN6–AINCOM  
AIN7–AINCOM  
AIN8–AINCOM  
AIN9–AINCOM (not a valid selection on the MQFP package)  
AIN10–AINCOM (not a valid selection on the MQFP package)  
AIN1–AIN2  
AIN3–AIN4  
AIN5–AIN6  
AIN7–AIN8  
Temperature Sensor1  
AINCOM–AINCOM  
1 Note the following about the temperature sensor:  
– When the temperature sensor is selected, user code must select the internal reference via the AXREF bit and clear the AUNI bit (ADC1CON.5) to select bipolar coding.  
– Chop mode must be enabled for correct temperature sensor operation.  
– The temperature sensor is factory calibrated to yield conversion results 800000H at 0°C (ADC chop on).  
– A +1°C change in temperature results in a +1 LSB change in the ADC1H register ADC conversion result.  
– The temperature sensor is not available on the ADuC847 or ADuC848.  
Rev. A | Page 45 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
SF (ADC SINC FILTER CONTROL REGISTER)  
The SF register is used to configure the decimation factor for the ADC, and therefore, has a direct influence on the ADC throughput rate.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D4H  
45H  
No  
Table 28. Sinc Filter SFR Bit Designations  
SF.7  
SF.6  
SF.5  
SF.4  
SF.3  
SF.2  
SF.1  
SF.0  
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
The bits in this register set the decimation factor of the ADC. This has a direct bearing on the throughput rate of the ADC along with the  
chop setting. The equations used to determine the ADC throughput rate are  
1
Fadc (Chop On) =  
× 32.768 kHz  
3×8× SFword  
where SFword is in decimal.  
1
Fadc (Chop Off) =  
8× SFword  
× 32.768 kHz  
where SFword is in decimal.  
Table 29. SF SFR Bit Examples  
Chop Enabled (ADCMODE.3 = 0)  
SF (Decimal) SF (Hexadecimal) Fadc (Hz) Tadc (ms) Tsettle (ms)  
131  
69  
82  
255  
0D  
45  
52  
FF  
105.3  
19.79  
16.65  
5.35  
9.52  
19.04  
101.1  
120.1  
373.54  
50.53  
60.06  
186.77  
Chop Disabled (ADCMODE.3 = 1)  
SF (Decimal) SF (Hexadecimal) Fadc (Hz) Tadc (ms) Tsettle (ms)  
3
03  
45  
52  
FF  
1365.3  
59.36  
49.95  
16.06  
0.73  
2.2  
69  
82  
255  
16.84  
20.02  
62.25  
50.52  
60.06  
186.8  
1 With chop enabled, if an SF word smaller than 13 is written to this SF register, the filter automatically defaults to 13.  
During ADC calibration, the user-programmed value of SF word is used. The SF word does not default to the maximum setting (255) as it  
did on previous MicroConverter® products. However, for optimum calibration results, it is recommended that the maximum SF word be set.  
Rev. A | Page 46 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ICON (EXCITATION CURRENT SOURCES CONTROL REGISTER)  
The ICON register is used to configure the current sources and the burnout detection source.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D5H  
00H  
No  
Table 30. Excitation Current Source SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
–––  
ICON.6  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Burnout Current Enable Bit.  
When set, this bit enables the sensor burnout current sources on primary ADC channels AIN4/AIN5 or  
AIN6/AIN7. Not available on any other ADC input pins or on the auxiliary ADC (ADuC845 only).  
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICON.5  
ICON.4  
ICON.3  
ICON.2  
ICON.1  
ICON.0  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
IEXC2 Pin Select (0 = AIN 8/AIN1 = AIN7).  
IEXC1 Pin Select (0 = AIN7/AIN1 = AIN 8).  
IEXC2 Enable Bit (0 = disable).  
IEXC1 Enable Bit (0 = disable).  
Note that a write to the ICON register has an immediate effect but does not reset the ADCs. Therefore, if a current source is changed while  
an ADC is already converting, the user must wait until the third or fourth output at least (depending on the status of the chop mode) to  
see a fully settled new output.  
Rev. A | Page 47 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
The following sections use the 62-kbyte program space as an  
example when referring to program and ULOAD mode. For the  
other memory models (32-kbyte and 8-kbyte), the ULOAD  
space moves to the top 6 kbytes of the on-chip program memory,  
that is, for the 32-kbyte memory model, the ULOAD space is  
from 26 kbytes to 32 kbytes. The kernel still resides in the  
protected area from 60 kbytes to 62 kbytes. The ULOAD space  
resides from 2 kbytes to 8 kbytes on the 8-byte part.  
NONVOLATILE FLASH/EE MEMORY OVERVIEW  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 incorporate Flash/EE  
memory technology on-chip to provide the user with nonvolatile,  
in-circuit reprogrammable code and data memory space.  
Like EEPROM, flash memory can be programmed in-system at  
the byte level, although it must first be erased, in page blocks.  
Thus, flash memory is often and more correctly referred to as  
Flash/EE memory.  
Flash/EE Memory Reliability  
The Flash/EE program and data memory arrays on the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 are fully qualified for two key  
Flash/EE memory characteristics: Flash/EE memory cycling  
endurance and Flash/EE memory data retention.  
EPROM  
TECHNOLOGY  
EEPROM  
TECHNOLOGY  
SPACE EFFICIENT/  
DENSITY  
IN-CIRCUIT  
REPROGRAMMABLE  
FLASH/EE MEMORY  
TECHNOLOGY  
Endurance quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to be  
cycled through many program, read, and erase cycles. In real  
terms, a single endurance cycle is composed of four  
independent, sequential events:  
Figure 26. Flash/EE Memory Development  
Overall, Flash/EE memory represents a step closer to the ideal  
memory device that includes nonvolatility, in-circuit program-  
mability, high density, and low cost. The Flash/EE memory  
technology incorporated allows the user to update program  
code space in-circuit, without needing to replace onetime  
programmable (OTP) devices at remote operating nodes.  
1. Initial page erase sequence  
2. Read/verify sequence  
3. Byte program sequence  
4. Second read/verify sequence  
Flash/EE Memory on the ADuC845, ADuC847, ADuC848  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 provide two arrays of  
Flash/EE memory for user applications—up to 62 kbytes of  
Flash/EE program space and 4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory  
space. Also, 8-kbyte and 32-kbyte program memory options are  
available. All examples and references in this datasheet use the  
62-kbyte option; however, similar protocols and procedures are  
applicable to the 32-kbyte and 8-kbyte options, provided that  
the difference in memory size is taken into account.  
In reliability qualification, every byte in both the program and  
data Flash/EE memory is cycled from 00H to FFH until a first  
fail is recorded, signifying the endurance limit of the on-chip  
Flash/EE memory.  
As indicated in the specification table, the ADuC845/ADuC847/  
ADuC848 Flash/EE memory endurance qualification has been  
carried out in accordance with JEDEC Specification A117 over  
the industrial temperature range of –40°C, +25°C, +85°C, and  
+125°C. (The CSP package is qualified to +85°C only.) The  
results allow the specification of a minimum endurance figure  
over supply and temperature of 100,000 cycles, with an endurance  
figure of 700,000 cycles being typical of operation at 25°C.  
The 62 kbytes Flash/EE code space are provided on-chip to  
facilitate code execution without any external discrete ROM  
device requirements. The program memory can be programmed  
in-circuit, using the serial download mode provided, using  
conventional third party memory programmers, or via any  
user-defined protocol in user download (ULOAD) mode.  
Retention is the ability of the Flash/EE memory to retain its  
programmed data over time.Again, the parts have been qualified  
in accordance with the formal JEDEC Retention Lifetime  
Specification (A117) at a specific junction temperature (TJ =  
55°C). As part of this qualification procedure, the Flash/EE  
memory is cycled to its specified endurance limit described  
previously, before data retention is characterized. This means  
that the Flash/EE memory is guaranteed to retain its data for its  
full specified retention lifetime every time the Flash/EE memory  
is reprogrammed. It should also be noted that retention lifetime,  
based on an activation energy of 0.6 eV, derates with TJ as shown  
in Figure 27.  
The 4-kbyte Flash/EE data memory space can be used as a  
general-purpose, nonvolatile scratchpad area. User access to this  
area is via a group of seven SFRs. This space can be programmed  
at a byte level, although it must first be erased in 4-byte pages.  
Rev. A | Page 48 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
300  
Serial Downloading (In-Circuit Programming)  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 facilitates code download  
via the standard UART serial port. The parts enter serial down-  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
load mode after a reset or a power cycle if the  
pin is pulled  
PSEN  
ADI SPECIFICATION  
100 YEARS MIN.  
low through an external 1 kΩ resistor. Once in serial download  
mode, the hidden embedded download kernel executes. This  
allows the user to download code to the full 62 kbytes of Flash/EE  
program memory while the device is in circuit in its target  
application hardware.  
AT T = 55°C  
J
A PC serial download executable (WSD.EXE) is provided as  
part of the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 Quick Start  
development system. Application Note uC004 fully describes  
the serial download protocol that is used by the embedded  
download kernel. This application note is available at  
www.analog.com/microconverter.  
0
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
110  
T
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)  
J
Figure 27. Flash/EE Memory Data Retention  
FLASH/EE PROGRAM MEMORY  
Parallel Programming  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 contain a 64-kbyte array of  
Flash/EE program memory. The lower 62 kbytes of this program  
memory are available to the user for program storage or as  
additional NV data memory.  
The parallel programming mode is fully compatible with  
conventional third-party flash or EEPROM device programmers.  
A block diagram of the external pin configuration required to  
support parallel programming is shown in Figure 29. In this  
mode, Ports 0 and 2 operate as the external address bus interface,  
P3 operates as the external data bus interface, and P1.0 operates  
as the write enable strobe. P1.1, P1.2, P1.3, and P1.4 are used as  
general configuration ports that configures the device for  
various program and erase operations during parallel  
programming.  
The upper 2 kbytes of this Flash/EE program memory array  
contain permanently embedded firmware, allowing in-circuit  
serial download, serial debug, and nonintrusive single-pin  
emulation. These 2 kbytes of embedded firmware also contain a  
power-on configuration routine that downloads factory  
calibrated coefficients to the various calibrated peripherals such  
as ADC, temperature sensor, current sources, band gap, and  
references.  
+5V  
ADuC845/  
ADuC847/  
ADuC848  
These 2 kbytes of embedded firmware are hidden from the user  
code. Attempts to read this space read 0s; therefore, the embedded  
firmware appears as NOP instructions to user code.  
P1.4–P1.1  
COMMAND  
P3.7–P3.0  
DATA  
In normal operating mode (power-on default), the 62 kbytes of  
user Flash/EE program memory appear as a single block. This  
block is used to store the user code as shown in Figure 28.  
P1.7–P1.5  
P1.0  
TIMING  
GND  
EA  
ENABLE  
RESET  
V
DD  
EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG KERNEL  
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED FIRMWARE ALLOWS  
FFFFH  
2kBYTE  
F800H  
CODE TO BE DOWNLOADED TO ANY OF THE  
62 kBYTES OF ON-CHIP PROGRAM MEMORY.  
THE KERNEL PROGRAM APPEARS AS NOP  
INSTRUCTIONS TO USER CODE.  
Figure 29. Flash/EE Memory Parallel Programming  
The command words that are assigned to P1.1, P1.2, P1.3, and  
P1.4 are described in Table 31.  
Table 31. Flash/EE Memory Parallel Programming Modes  
Port 1 Pins  
P1.4 P1.3 P1.2 P1.1 Programming Mode  
USER PROGRAM MEMORY  
62 kBYTES OF FLASH/EE PROGRAM MEMORY  
ARE AVAILABLE TO THE USER. ALL OF THIS  
SPACE CAN BE PROGRAMMED FROM THE  
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG  
KERNEL OR IN PARALLEL PROGRAMMING MODE.  
F7FFH  
62kBYTE  
0000H  
0
0
0
0
Erase Flash/EE Program, Data, and  
Security Mode  
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Program Code Byte  
Program Data Byte  
Read Code Byte  
Figure 28. Flash/EE Program Memory Map in Normal Mode  
Read Data Byte  
In normal mode, the 62 kbytes of Flash/EE program memory  
can be programmed by serial downloading and by parallel  
programming.  
Program Security Modes  
Read/Verify Security Modes  
Redundant  
All other codes  
Rev. A | Page 49 of 108  
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
USER DOWNLOAD MODE (ULOAD)  
The 32-kbyte memory parts have the user bootload space  
starting at 6000H. The memory mapping is shown in Figure 31.  
Figure 28 shows that it is possible to use the 62 kbytes of  
Flash/EE program memory available to the user as one single  
block of memory. In this mode, all the Flash/EE memory is  
read-only to user code.  
EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG KERNEL  
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED FIRMWARE ALLOWS  
FFFFH  
2kBYTE  
F800H  
CODE TO BE DOWNLOADED TO ANY OF THE  
32 kBYTES OF ON-CHIP PROGRAM MEMORY.  
THE KERNEL PROGRAM APPEARS AS NOP  
INSTRUCTIONS TO USER CODE.  
However, most of the Flash/EE program memory can also be  
written to during run time simply by entering ULOAD mode.  
In ULOAD mode, the lower 56 kbytes of program memory can  
be erased and reprogrammed by the user software as shown in  
Figure 30. ULOAD mode can be used to upgrade the code in  
the field via any user-defined download protocol. By configuring  
the SPI port on the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 as a slave, it  
is possible to completely reprogram the 56 kbytes of Flash/EE  
program memory in under 5 s (see Application Note uC007,  
“User Download Mode” at www.analog.com/microconverter).  
NOT AVAILABLE TO USER  
USER BOOTLOADER SPACE  
THE USER BOOTLOADER  
8000H  
8kBYTE  
6000H  
SPACE CAN BE PROGRAMMED IN  
DOWNLOAD/DEBUG MODE VIA THE  
KERNEL BUT IS READ ONLY WHEN  
32 kBYTES  
EXECUTING USER CODE  
OF USER  
CODE  
MEMORY  
5FFFH  
24kBYTE  
0000H  
USER DOWNLOADER SPACE  
EITHER THE DOWNLOAD/DEBUG  
KERNEL OR USER CODE (IN ULOAD  
MODE) CAN PROGRAM THIS SPACE  
Alternatively, ULOAD mode can be used to save data to the  
56 kbytes of Flash/EE memory. This can be extremely useful in  
data logging applications where the parts can provide up to  
60 kbytes of data memory on-chip (4 kbytes of dedicated  
Flash/EE data memory also exist).  
Figure 31. Flash/EE Program Memory Map in ULOAD Mode (32-kbyte Part)  
ULOAD mode is not available on the 8-kbyte Flash/EE program  
memory parts.  
Flash/EE Program Memory Security  
The upper 6 kbytes of the 62 kbytes of Flash/EE program  
memory (8 kbytes on the 32-kbyte parts) are programmable  
only via serial download or parallel programming. This means  
that this space appears as read-only to user code; therefore, it  
cannot be accidentally erased or reprogrammed by erroneous  
code execution, making it very suitable to use the 6 kbytes as a  
bootloader. A bootload enable option exists in the Windows®  
serial downloader (WSD) to Always RUN from E000H after  
Reset.” If using a bootloader, this option is recommended to  
ensure that the bootloader always executes correct code after  
reset.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 facilitate three modes of  
Flash/EE program memory security: the lock, secure, and serial  
safe modes. These modes can be independently activated,  
restricting access to the internal code space. They can be  
enabled as part of serial download protocol, as described in  
Application Note uC004, or via parallel programming.  
Lock Mode  
This mode locks the code memory, disabling parallel program-  
ming of the program memory. However, reading the memory in  
parallel mode and reading the memory via a MOVC command  
from external memory are still allowed. This mode is deactivated  
by initiating an ERASE CODE AND DATA command in serial  
download or parallel programming modes.  
Programming the Flash/EE program memory via ULOAD  
mode is described in the Flash/EE Memory Control SFR section  
of ECON and also in Application Note uC007  
Secure Mode  
(www.analog.com/microconverter).  
This mode locks the code memory, disabling parallel program-  
ming of the program memory. Reading/verifying the memory  
in parallel mode and reading the internal memory via a MOVC  
command from external memory are also disabled. This mode  
is deactivated by initiating an ERASE CODE AND DATA  
command in serial download or parallel programming modes.  
EMBEDDED DOWNLOAD/DEBUG KERNEL  
PERMANENTLY EMBEDDED FIRMWARE ALLOWS  
CODE TO BE DOWNLOADED TO ANY OF THE  
FFFFH  
2kBYTE  
F800H  
62 kBYTES OF ON-CHIP PROGRAM MEMORY.  
THE KERNEL PROGRAM APPEARS AS NOP  
INSTRUCTIONS TO USER CODE.  
F7FFH  
6kBYTE  
E000H  
USER BOOTLOADER SPACE  
THE USER BOOTLOADER  
SPACE CAN BE PROGRAMMED IN  
DOWNLOAD/DEBUG MODE VIA THE  
KERNEL BUT IS READ ONLY WHEN  
Serial Safe Mode  
This mode disables serial download capability on the device. If  
serial safe mode is activated and an attempt is made to reset the  
part into serial download mode, that is, RESET asserted (pulled  
62 kBYTES  
OF USER  
CODE  
EXECUTING USER CODE  
dFFFH  
56kBYTE  
0000H  
USER DOWNLOADER SPACE  
MEMORY  
EITHER THE DOWNLOAD/DEBUG  
KERNEL OR USER CODE (IN  
ULOAD MODE) CAN PROGRAM  
THIS SPACE  
high) and de-asserted (pulled low) with  
low, the part  
PSEN  
interprets the serial download reset as a normal reset only. It  
therefore does not enter serial download mode, but executes only  
a normal reset sequence. Serial safe mode can be disabled only  
by initiating an ERASE CODE AND DATA command in  
parallel programming mode.  
Figure 30. Flash/EE Program Memory Map in ULOAD Mode (62-kbyte Part)  
Rev. A | Page 50 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
BYTE 1  
(0FFCH)  
BYTE 3  
(0FFEH)  
BYTE 2  
BYTE 4  
(0FFFH)  
USING FLASH/EE DATA MEMORY  
3FFH  
3FEH  
(0FFDH)  
BYTE 1  
(0FF8H)  
BYTE 2  
(0FF9H)  
BYTE 3  
(0FFAH)  
BYTE 4  
(0FFBH)  
The 4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory are configured as 1024  
pages, each of 4 bytes. As with the other ADuC845/ADuC847/  
ADuC848 peripherals, the interface to this memory space is via  
a group of registers mapped in the SFR space. A group of four  
data registers (EDATA1–4) holds the 4 bytes of data at each  
page. The page is addressed via the EADRH and EADRL  
registers. Finally, ECON is an 8-bit control register that can be  
written to with one of nine Flash/EE memory access commands  
to trigger various read, write, erase, and verify functions. A block  
diagram of the SFR interface to the Flash/EE data memory array  
is shown in Figure 32.  
BYTE 1  
(000CH)  
BYTE 3  
(000EH)  
BYTE 4  
(000FH)  
BYTE 2  
(000DH)  
03H  
02H  
01H  
00H  
BYTE 1  
(0008H)  
BYTE 3  
(000AH)  
BYTE 4  
(000BH)  
BYTE 2  
(0009H)  
BYTE 1  
(0004H)  
BYTE 3  
(0006H)  
BYTE 4  
(0007H)  
BYTE 2  
(0005H)  
BYTE 1  
(0000H)  
BYTE 3  
(0002H)  
BYTE 4  
(0003H)  
BYTE 2  
(0001H)  
BYTE  
ADDRESSES  
ARE GIVEN IN  
BRACKETS  
ECON—Flash/EE Memory Control SFR  
Programming either Flash/EE data memory or Flash/EE  
program memory is done through the Flash/EE memory  
control SFR (ECON). This SFR allows the user to read, write,  
erase, or verify the 4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory or the  
56 kbytes of Flash/EE program memory.  
Figure 32. Flash/EE Data Memory Control and Configuration  
Table 32. ECON—Flash/EE Memory Commands  
Command Description  
(Normal Mode, Power-On Default)  
Command Description  
(ULOAD Mode)  
ECON Value  
01H Read  
4 bytes in the Flash/EE data memory, addressed by the  
page address EADRH/L, are read into EDATA1–4.  
Not implemented. Use the MOVC instruction.  
02H Write  
Results in 4 bytes in EDATA1–4 being written to the  
Flash/EE data memory, at the page address given by  
Bytes 0 to 255 of internal XRAM are written to the 256 bytes of  
Flash/EE program memory at the page address given by  
EADRH (0 EADRH < 0400H). Note that the 4 bytes in the EADRH/L (0 EADRH/L < E0H).  
page being addressed must be pre-erased.  
Note that the 256 bytes in the page being addressed must be  
pre-erased.  
03H  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
04H Verify  
Verifies that the data in EDATA1–4 is contained in the  
page address given by EADRH/L. A subsequent read of  
the ECON SFR results in a 0 being read if the verification  
is valid, or a nonzero value being read to indicate an  
invalid verification.  
Not implemented. Use the MOVC and MOVX instructions to  
verify the Write in software.  
05H Erase Page 4-byte page of Flash/EE data memory address is erased  
by the page address EADRH/L.  
64-byte page of FLASH/EE program memory addressed by the  
byte address EADRH/L is erased. A new page starts when EADRL  
is equal to 00H, 80H, or C0H.  
06H Erase All  
81H ReadByte  
4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory are erased.  
The entire 56 kbytes of ULOAD are erased.  
Not implemented. Use the MOVC command.  
The byte in the Flash/EE data memory, addressed by the  
byte address EADRH/L, is read into EDATA1 (0 EADRH/L  
0FFFH).  
82H WriteByte  
0FH EXULOAD  
F0H ULOAD  
The byte in EDATA1 is written into Flash/EE data memory The byte in EDATA1 is written into Flash/EE program memory at  
at the byte address EADRH/L.  
the byte address EADRH/L (0 ≤ EADRH/L ≤ DFFFH).  
Configures the ECON instructions (above) to operate on  
Flash/EE data memory.  
Enters normal mode, directing subsequent ECON instructions to  
operate on the Flash/EE data memory.  
Enters ULOAD mode; subsequent ECON instructions  
operate on Flash/EE program memory.  
Enables the ECON instructions to operate on the Flash/EE  
program memory. ULOAD entry mode.  
Rev. A | Page 51 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Example: Programming the Flash/EE Data Memory  
FLASH/EE MEMORY TIMING  
A user wants to program F3H into the second byte on Page 03H  
of the Flash/EE data memory space while preserving the other  
3 bytes already in this page. A typical program of the Flash/EE  
data array involves  
Typical program and erase times for the parts are as follows:  
Normal Mode (Operating on Flash/EE Data Memory)  
Command  
Bytes Affected  
4 bytes  
4 bytes  
4 bytes  
4 bytes  
4 kbytes  
1 byte  
1 byte  
READPAGE  
WRITEPAGE  
VERIFYPAGE  
ERASEPAGE  
ERASEALL  
25 machine cycles  
380 µs  
25 machine cycles  
2 ms  
2 ms  
10 machine cycles  
200 µs  
1. Setting EADRH/L with the page address.  
2. Writing the data to be programmed to the EDATA1–4.  
3. Writing the ECON SFR with the appropriate command.  
READBYTE  
WRITEBYTE  
Step 1: Set Up the Page Address  
Address registers EADRH and EADRL hold the high byte  
address and the low byte address of the page to be addressed.  
The assembly language to set up the address may appear as  
ULOAD Mode (Operating on Flash/EE Program Memory)  
WRITEPAGE  
ERASEPAGE  
ERASEALL  
256 bytes  
64 bytes  
56 kbytes  
1 byte  
15 ms  
2 ms  
2 ms  
MOV EADRH, #0  
MOV EADRL, #03H  
;Set Page Address Pointer  
Step 2: Set Up the EDATA Registers  
WRITEBYTE  
200 µs  
Write the four values to be written into the page into the four  
SFRs EDATA1–4. Unfortunately, the user does not know three  
of them. Thus, the user must read the current page and overwrite  
the second byte.  
Note that a given mode of operation is initiated as soon as the  
command word is written to the ECON SFR. The core micro-  
controller operation is idled until the requested program/read  
or erase mode is completed. In practice, this means that even  
though the Flash/EE memory mode of operation is typically  
initiated with a two-machine-cycle MOV instruction (to write  
to the ECON SFR), the next instruction is not executed until the  
Flash/EE operation is complete. This means that the core cannot  
respond to interrupt requests until the Flash/EE operation is  
complete, although the core peripheral functions such as counter/  
timers continue to count as configured throughout this period.  
MOV ECON,  
#1  
;Read Page into EDATA1-4  
MOV EDATA2, #0F3H ;Overwrite Byte 2  
Step 3: Program Page  
A byte in the Flash/EE array can be programmed only if it has  
previously been erased. Specifically, a byte can be programmed  
only if it already holds the value FFH. Because of the Flash/EE  
architecture, this erasure must happen at a page level; therefore,  
a minimum of 4 bytes (1 page) are erased when an erase  
command is initiated. Once the page is erased, the user can  
program the 4 bytes in-page and then perform a verification of  
the data.  
MOV ECON, #5  
MOV ECON, #2  
MOV ECON, #4  
MOV A, ECON  
;ERASE Page  
;WRITE Page  
;VERIFY Page  
;Check if ECON = 0 (OK!)  
Although the 4 kbytes of Flash/EE data memory are factory pre-  
erased, that is, byte locations set to FFH, it is good programming  
practice to include an ERASEALL routine as part of any  
configuration/set-up code running on the parts. An ERASEALL  
command consists of writing 06H to the ECON SFR, which  
initiates an erase of the 4-kbyte Flash/EE array. This command  
coded in 8051 assembly language would appear as  
MOV ECON, #06H  
;ERASE all Command  
;2ms duration  
Rev. A | Page 52 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DAC CIRCUIT INFORMATION  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 incorporate a 12-bit,  
voltage output DAC on-chip. It has a rail-to-rail voltage output  
buffer capable of driving 10 kΩ/100 pF, and has two selectable  
ranges, 0 V to VREF and 0 V to AVDD. It can operate in 12-bit or  
8-bit mode. The DAC has a control register, DACCON, and two  
data registers, DACH/L. The DAC output can be programmed  
to appear at Pin 14 or Pin 13 (AINCOM).  
Note that in 12-bit mode, the DAC voltage output is updated as  
soon as the DACL data SFR is written; therefore, the DAC data  
registers should be updated as DACH first, followed by DACL.  
The 12-bit DAC data should be written into DACH/L right-  
justified such that DACL contains the lower 8 bits, and the  
lower nibble of DACH contains the upper 4 bits.  
DACCON Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
FDH  
00H  
No  
Table 33. DACCON—DAC Configuration Commands  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
5
4
–––  
–––  
–––  
DACPIN  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
DAC Output Pin Select.  
Set to 1 by the user to direct the DAC output to Pin 13 (AINCOM).  
Cleared to 0 by the user to direct the DAC output to Pin 14 (DAC).  
DAC 8-Bit Mode Bit.  
3
DAC8  
Set to 1 by the user to enable 8-bit DAC operation. In this mode, the 8 bits in DACL SFR are routed to the 8 MSBs  
of the DAC, and the 4 LSBs of the DAC are set to 0.  
Cleared to 0 by the user to enable 12-bit DAC operation. In this mode, the 8 LSBs of the result are routed to  
DACL, and the upper 4 MSB bits are routed to the lower 4 bits of DACH.  
2
1
0
DACRN  
DACCLR  
DACEN  
DAC Output Range Bit.  
Set to 1 by the user to configure the DAC range of 0 V to AVDD  
.
Cleared to 0 by the user to configure the DAC range of 0 V to 2.5 V (VREF).  
DAC Clear Bit.  
Set to 1 by the user to enable normal DAC operation.  
Cleared to 0 by the user to reset the DAC data registers DACL/H to 0.  
DAC Enable Bit.  
Set to 1 by the user to enable normal DAC operation.  
Cleared to 0 by the user to power down the DAC.  
DACH/DACL Data Registers  
These DAC data registers are written to by the user to update  
the DAC output.  
SFR Address:  
DACL (DAC Data Low Byte)—FBH  
DACH (DAC Data High Byte)—FCH  
00H (Both Registers)  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
No (Both Registers)  
Rev. A | Page 53 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
V
DD  
Using the DAC  
V
–50mV  
DD  
The on-chip DAC architecture consists of a resistor string DAC  
followed by an output buffer amplifier, the functional equivalent  
of which is shown in Figure 33.  
V
–100mV  
DD  
AV  
DD  
V
REF  
R
R
R
OUTPUT  
BUFFER  
100mV  
14  
50mV  
0mV  
FFFH  
000H  
HIGH-Z  
DISABLE  
(FROM MCU)  
Figure 34. Endpoint Nonlinearities Due to Amplifier Saturation  
R
R
The endpoint nonlinearities shown in Figure 34 become worse  
as a function of output loading. Most data sheet specifications  
assume a 10 kΩ resistive load to ground at the DAC output. As  
the output is forced to source or sink more current, the nonlinear  
regions at the top or bottom, respectively, of Figure 34 become  
larger. With larger current demands, this can significantly limit  
output voltage swing. Figure 35 and Figure 36 illustrate this  
behavior. Note that the upper trace in each of these figures is  
valid only for an output range selection of 0 V to AVDD. In 0 V-  
to-VREF mode, DAC loading does not cause high-side voltage  
nonlinearities while the reference voltage remains below the  
Figure 33. Resistor String DAC Functional Equivalent  
Features of this architecture include inherent guaranteed  
monotonicity and excellent differential linearity. As shown in  
Figure 33, the reference source for the DAC is user-selectable in  
software. It can be either AVDD or VREF. In 0 V-to-AVDD mode,  
the DAC output transfer function spans from 0 V to the voltage  
at the AVDD pin. In 0 V-to-VREF mode, the DAC output transfer  
function spans from 0 V to the internal VREF (2.5 V). The DAC  
output buffer amplifier features a true rail-to-rail output stage  
implementation. This means that, unloaded, each output is  
capable of swinging to within less than 100 mV of both AVDD  
and ground. Moreover, the DAC’s linearity specification (when  
driving a 10 kΩ resistive load to ground) is guaranteed through  
the full transfer function except Codes 0 to 48 in 0 V-to-VREF  
mode and 0 to 100 and 3950 to 4095 in 0 V-to-VDD mode.  
upper trace in the corresponding figure. For example, if AVDD  
3 V and VREF = 2.5 V, the high-side voltage is not affected by  
loads of less than 5 mA. But around 7 mA, the upper curve in  
Figure 36 drops below 2.5 V (VREF), indicating that at these  
=
higher currents, the output is not capable of reaching VREF  
.
5
DAC LOADED WITH 0FFFH  
4
Linearity degradation near ground and VDD is caused by satura-  
tion of the output amplifier; a general representation of its effects  
(neglecting offset and gain error) is shown in Figure 34. The  
dotted line indicates the ideal transfer function, and the solid  
line represents what the transfer function might look like with  
endpoint nonlinearities due to saturation of the output amplifier.  
3
2
1
DAC LOADED WITH 0000H  
Note that Figure 34 represents a transfer function in 0-to-VDD  
mode only. In 0 V-to-VREF mode (with VREF < VDD), the lower  
nonlinearity would be similar, but the upper portion of the  
transfer function would follow the ideal line to the end, showing  
no signs of the high-end endpoint linearity error.  
0
0
5
10  
15  
SOURCE/SINK CURRENT (mA)  
Figure 35. Source and Sink Current Capability with VREF = AVDD = 5 V  
Rev. A | Page 54 of 108  
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
3
2
1
0
PULSE-WIDTH MODULATOR (PWM)  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 has a highly flexible PWM  
offering programmable resolution and an input clock. The  
PWM can be configured in six different modes of operation.  
Two of these modes allow the PWM to be configured as a Σ-∆  
DAC with up to 16 bits of resolution. A block diagram of the  
PWM is shown in Figure 38.  
DAC LOADED WITH 0FFFH  
12.583MHz (FVCO)  
EXTERNAL CLOCK ON P2.7  
32.768kHz (FXTAL)  
CLOCK  
SELECT  
PROGRAMMABLE  
DIVIDER  
DAC LOADED WITH 0000H  
32.768kHz/15  
0
5
10  
15  
16-BIT PWM COUNTER  
SOURCE/SINK CURRENT (mA)  
Figure 36. Source and Sink Current Capability with VREF = AVDD = 3 V  
P2.5  
P2.6  
For larger loads, the current drive capability may not be sufficient.  
To increase the source and sink current capability of the DAC,  
an external buffer should be added as shown in Figure 37.  
COMPARE  
MODE  
PWM0H/L PWM1H/L  
Figure 38. PWM Block Diagram  
The PWM uses control SFR, PWMCON, and four data SFRs:  
PWM0H, PWM0L, PWM1H, and PWM1L.  
ADuC845/  
ADuC847/ DAC  
ADuC848  
14  
PWMCON (as described in Table 34) controls the different  
modes of operation of the PWM as well as the PWM clock  
frequency. PWM0H/L and PWM1H/L are the data registers that  
determine the duty cycles of the PWM outputs at P2.5 and P2.6.  
Figure 37. Buffering the DAC Output  
The internal DAC output buffer also features a high impedance  
disable function. In the chips default power-on state, the DAC is  
disabled and its output is in a high impedance state (or three-  
state) where it remains inactive until enabled in software. This  
means that if a zero output is desired during power-on or  
power-down transient conditions, a pull-down resistor must be  
added to each DAC output. Assuming that this resistor is in  
place, the DAC output remains at ground potential whenever  
the DAC is disabled.  
To use the PWM user software, first write to PWMCON to  
select the PWM mode of operation and the PWM input clock.  
Writing to PWMCON also resets the PWM counter. In any of  
the 16-bit modes of operation (Modes 1, 3, 4, 6), user software  
should write to the PWM0L or PWM1L SFRs first. This value is  
written to a hidden SFR. Writing to the PWM0H or PWM1H  
SFRs updates both the PWMxH and the PWMxL SFRs but does  
not change the outputs until the end of the PWM cycle in  
progress. The values written to these 16-bit registers are then  
used in the next PWM cycle.  
Rev. A | Page 55 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
PWMCON PWM Control SFR  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
AEH  
00H  
No  
Table 34. PWMCON PWM Control SFR  
Bit No. Name Description  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
7
–––  
6, 5, 4  
PWM2, PWM1, PWM0 PMW Mode Selection.  
PWM2 PWM1 PWM0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Mode 0: PWM disabled.  
Mode 1: Single 16-bit output with programmable pulse and cycle time.  
Mode 2: Twin 8-bit outputs.  
Mode 3: Twin 16-bit outputs.  
Mode 4: Dual 16-bit pulse density outputs.  
Mode 5: Dual 8-bit outputs.  
Mode 6: Dual 16-bit pulse density RZ outputs.  
Mode 7: PWM counter reset with outputs not used.  
3, 2  
1, 0  
PWS1, PWS0  
PWC1, PWC0  
PWM Clock Source Divider.  
PWS1  
PWS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Selected clock.  
Selected clock divided by 4.  
Selected clock divided by 16.  
Selected clock divided by 64.  
PWM Clock Source Selection.  
PWC1 PWC0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
FXTAL/15 (2.184 kHz).  
FXTAL (32.768 kHz).  
External input on P2.7.  
FVCO (12.58 MHz).  
PWM Pulse Width High Byte (PWM0H)  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
B2H  
00H  
No  
Table 35. PWM0H: PWM Pulse Width High Byte  
PWM0H.7  
PWM0H.6  
PWM0H.5  
PWM0H.4  
PWM0H.3  
PWM0H.2  
PWM0H.1  
PWM0H.0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
PWM Pulse Width Low Byte (PWM0L)  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
B1H  
00H  
No  
Table 36. PWM0L: PWM Pulse Width Low Byte  
PWM0L.7  
PWM0L.6  
PWM0L.5  
PWM0L.4  
PWM0L.3  
PWM0L.2  
PWM0L.1  
PWM0L.0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Rev. A | Page 56 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
PWM Cycle Width High Byte (PWM1H)  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
B4H  
00H  
No  
Table 37. PWM1H: PWM Cycle Width High Byte  
PWM1H.7  
PWM1H.6  
PWM1H.5  
PWM1H.4  
PWM1H.3  
PWM1H.2  
PWM1H.1  
PWM1H.0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
PWM Cycle Width Low Byte (PWM1L)  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
B3H  
00H  
No  
Table 38. PWM1L: PWM Cycle Width Low Byte  
PWM1L.7  
PWM1L.6  
PWM1L.5  
PWM1L.4  
PWM1L.3  
PWM1L.2  
PWM1L.1  
PWM1L.0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Mode 0  
Mode 2 (Twin 8-Bit PWM)  
In Mode 0, the PWM is disabled, allowing P2.5 and P2.6 to be  
used as normal digital I/Os.  
In Mode 2, the duty cycle and the resolution of the PWM  
outputs are programmable. The maximum resolution of the  
PWM output is 8 bits.  
Mode 1 (Single-Variable Resolution PWM)  
In Mode 1, both the pulse length and the cycle time (period) are  
programmable in user code, allowing the resolution of the PWM  
to be variable. PWM1H/L sets the period of the output waveform.  
Reducing PWM1H/L reduces the resolution of the PWM output  
but increases the maximum output rate of the PWM. For  
example, setting PWM1H/L to 65536 gives a 16-bit PWM with  
a maximum output rate of 192 Hz (12.583 MHz/65536). Setting  
PWM1H/L to 4096 gives a 12-bit PWM with a maximum  
output rate of 3072 Hz (12.583 MHz/4096).  
PWM1L sets the period for both PWM outputs. Typically, this is  
set to 255 (FFH) to give an 8-bit PWM, although it is possible to  
reduce this as necessary. A value of 100 could be loaded here to  
give a percentage PWM, that is, the PWM is accurate to 1%.  
The outputs of the PWM at P2.5 and P2.6 are shown in Figure 40.  
As can be seen, the output of PWM0 (P2.5) goes low when the  
PWM counter equals PWM0L. The output of PWM1 (P2.6) goes  
high when the PWM counter equals PWM1H and goes low  
again when the PWM counter equals PWM0H. Setting PWM1H  
to 0 ensures that both PWM outputs start simultaneously.  
PWM0H/L sets the duty cycle of the PWM output waveform as  
shown in Figure 39.  
PWM1L  
PWM COUNTER  
PWM1H/L  
PWM COUNTER  
PWM0H  
PWM0L  
PWM0H/L  
PWM1H  
0
0
P2.5  
P2.6  
P2.6  
Figure 39. PWM in Mode 1  
Figure 40. PWM Mode 2  
Rev. A | Page 57 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mode 3 (Twin 16-Bit PWM)  
Mode 4 (Dual NRZ 16-Bit Σ-DAC)  
In Mode 3, the PWM counter is fixed to count from 0 to 65536,  
giving a fixed 16-bit PWM. Operating from the 12.58 MHz core  
clock results in a PWM output rate of 192 Hz. The duty cycle of  
the PWM outputs at P2.5 and P2.6 are independently  
programmable.  
Mode 4 provides a high speed PWM output similar to that of a  
Σ-DAC. Typically, this mode is used with the PWM clock  
equal to 12.58 MHz.  
In this mode, P1.0 and P1.1 are updated every PWM clock  
(80 ns in the case of 12.58 MHz). Over any 65536 cycles (16-bit  
PWM), PWM0 (P1.0) is high for PWM0H/L cycles and low for  
(65536 – PWM0H/L) cycles. Similarly, PWM1 (P1.1) is high for  
PWM1H/L cycles and low for (65536 – PWM1H/L) cycles.  
As shown in Figure 41, while the PWM counter is less than  
PWM0H/L, the output of PWM0 (P2.5) is high. Once the PWM  
counter equals PWM0H/L, PWM0 (P2.5) goes low and remains  
low until the PWM counter rolls over.  
If PWM1H is set to 4010H (slightly above one-quarter of FS),  
typically P1.1 is low for three clocks and high for one clock  
(each clock is approximately 80 ns). Over every 65536 clocks,  
the PWM compromises for the fact that the output should be  
slightly above one-quarter of full scale, by having a high cycle  
followed by only two low cycles.  
Similarly, while the PWM counter is less than PWM1H/L, the  
output of PWM1 (P2.6) is high. Once the PWM counter equals  
PWM1H/L, PWM1 (P2.6) goes low and remains low until the  
PWM counter rolls over.  
In this mode, both PWM outputs are synchronized, that is, once  
the PWM counter rolls over to 0, both PWM0 (P2.5) and PWM1  
(P2.6) go high.  
PWM0H/L = C000H  
CARRY OUT AT P2.5  
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
16-BIT  
65536  
PWM COUNTER  
PWM1H/L  
80µs  
16-BIT  
16-BIT  
PWM0H/L  
0
12.583MHz  
16-BIT  
LATCH  
P2.5  
P2.6  
16-BIT  
0
0
0
0
1
CARRY OUT AT P2.6  
16-BIT  
Figure 41. PWM Mode 3  
80µs  
PWM1H/L = 4000H  
Figure 42. PWM Mode 4  
For faster DAC outputs (at lower resolution), write 0s to the  
LSBs that are not required with a 1 in the LSB position. If, for  
example, only 12-bit performance is required, write 0001 to the  
4 LSBs. This means that a 12-bit accurate Σ -Δ DAC output can  
occur at 3 kHz. Similarly, writing 00000001 to the 8 LSBs gives  
an 8-bit accurate Σ-Δ DAC output at 49 kHz.  
Rev. A | Page 58 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mode 5 (Dual 8-Bit PWM)  
The output resolution is set by the PWM1L and PWM1H SFRs  
for the P2.5 and P2.6 outputs, respectively. PWM0L and PWM0H  
set the duty cycles of the PWM outputs at P2.5 and P2.6,  
respectively. Both PWMs have the same clock source and clock  
divider.  
In Mode 5, the duty cycle and the resolution of the PWM outputs  
are individually programmable. The maximum resolution of the  
PWM output is 8 bits.  
PWM1L  
PWM COUNTERS  
PWM0H/L = C000H  
PWM1H  
PWM0L  
CARRY OUT AT P2.5  
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
16-BIT  
PWM0H  
0
318µs  
16-BIT  
16-BIT  
P2.5  
P2.6  
3.146MHz  
16-BIT  
LATCH  
Figure 43. PWM Mode 5  
16-BIT  
Mode 6 (Dual RZ 16-Bit Σ-DAC)  
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Mode 6 provides a high speed PWM output similar to that of a  
Σ-Δ DAC. Mode 6 operates very similarly to Mode 4; however,  
the key difference is that Mode 6 provides return to zero (RZ)  
Σ-Δ DAC output. Mode 4 provides non-return-to-zero Σ-Δ  
DAC outputs. RZ mode ensures that any difference in the rise  
and fall times does not affect the Σ-Δ DAC INL. However, RZ  
mode halves the dynamic range of the Σ-Δ DAC outputs from 0  
V− to AVDD down to 0 V to AVDD/2. For best results, this mode  
should be used with a PWM clock divider of 4.  
0, 3/4, 1/2, 1/4, 0  
CARRY OUT AT P2.6  
16-BIT  
318µs  
PWM1H/L = 4000H  
Figure 44. PWM Mode 6  
Mode 7  
In Mode 7, the PWM is disabled, allowing P2.5 and P2.6 to be  
used as normal.  
If PWM1H is set to 4010H (slightly above one-quarter of FS),  
typically P2.6 is low for three full clocks (3 × 80 ns), high for  
one-half a clock (40 ns), and then low again for one-half a clock  
(40 ns) before repeating itself. Over every 65536 clocks, the  
PWM compromises for the fact that the output should be  
slightly above one-quarter of full scale by leaving the output  
high for two half clocks in four every so often.  
For faster DAC outputs (at lower resolution), write 0s to the  
LSBs that are not required with a 1 in the LSB position. If, for  
example, only 12-bit performance is required, write 0001 to the  
4 LSBs. This means that a 12-bit accurate Σ-Δ DAC output can  
occur at 3 kHz. Similarly, writing 00000001 to the 8 LSBs gives  
an 8-bit accurate Σ-Δ DAC output at 49 kHz.  
Rev. A | Page 59 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ON-CHIP PLL (PLLCON)  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 are intended for use with a  
32.768 kHz watch crystal. A PLL locks onto a multiple (384) of  
this to provide a stable 12.582912 MHz clock for the system.  
The core can operate at this frequency or at binary submultiples  
of it to allow power saving when maximum core performance is  
not required. The default core clock is the PLL clock divided by  
8 or 1.572864 MHz. The ADC clocks are also derived from the  
PLL clock, with the modulator rate being the same as the crystal  
oscillator frequency. The control register for the PLL is called  
PLLCON and is described as follows.  
The 5 V parts can be set to a maximum core frequency of  
12.58 MHz (CD2...0 = 000) while at 3 V, the maximum core  
clock rate is 6.29 MHz (CD2...0 = 001). The CD bits should not  
be set to 000b on the 3 V parts.  
The 3 V parts are limited to a core clock speed of 6.29 MHz  
(CD = 1).  
PLLCON PLL Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
D7H  
53H  
No  
Table 39. PLLCON PLL Control Register  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
OSC_PD  
Oscillator Power-Down Bit.  
If low, the 32 kHz crystal oscillator continues running in power-down mode.  
If high, the 32.768 kHz oscillator is powered down.  
When this bit is low, the seconds counter continues to count in power-down mode and can interrupt the CPU  
to exit power-down. The oscillator is always enabled in normal mode.  
6
LOCK  
PLL Lock Bit. This is a read-only bit.  
Set automatically at power-on to indicate that the PLL loop is correctly tracking the crystal clock. After power-  
down, this bit can be polled to wait for the PLL to lock.  
Cleared automatically at power-on to indicate that the PLL is not correctly tracking the crystal clock. This  
might be due to the absence of a crystal clock or an external crystal at power-on. In this mode, the PLL output  
can be 12.58 MHz 20%. After the part wakes up from power-down, user code can poll this bit to wait for the  
PLL to lock. If LOCK = 0, the PLL is not locked.  
5
4
3
–––  
LTEA  
FINT  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
EA Status. Read-only bit. Reading this bit returns the state of the external EA pin latched at reset or power-on.  
Fast Interrupt Response Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the response to any interrupt to be executed at the fastest core clock frequency.  
Cleared by the user to disable the fast interrupt response feature.  
2, 1, 0  
CD2, CD1, CD0  
CPU (Core Clock) Divider Bits. This number determines the frequency at which the core operates.  
CD2  
0
CD1  
0
CD0  
0
Core Clock Frequency (MHz)  
12.582912  
0
0
1
6.291456 (Maximum core clock rate allowed on the 3 V parts)  
0
1
0
3.145728  
0
1
1
1.572864 (Default core frequency)  
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.786432  
0.393216  
0.196608  
0.098304  
Rev. A | Page 60 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Note that when using the I2C and SPI interfaces simultaneously,  
they both use the same interrupt routine (Vector Address 3BH).  
When an interrupt occurs from one of these, it is necessary to  
interrogate each interface to see which one has triggered the ISR  
request.  
I2C SERIAL INTERFACE  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 support a fully licensed  
I2C serial interface. The I2C interface is implemented as a full  
hardware slave and software master. SDATA (Pin 27 on the  
MQFP package and Pin 29 on the CSP package) is the data I/O  
pin. SCLK (Pin 26 on the MQFP package and Pin 28 on the CSP  
package) is the serial interface clock for the SPI interface. The  
I2C interface on the parts is fully independent of all other pin/  
function multiplexing. The I2C interface incorporated on the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 also includes a second address  
register (I2CADD1) at SFR Address F2H with a default power-  
on value of 7FH. The I2C interface is always available to the user  
and is not multiplexed with any other I/O functionality on the  
chip. This means that the I2C and SPI interfaces can be used at  
the same time.  
The four SFRs are used to control the I2C interface are  
described next.  
I2CCON—I2C Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
E8H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 40. I2CCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
I2C Software Master Data Output Bit (master mode only).  
7
MDO  
This data bit is used to implement a master I2C transmitter interface in software. Data written to this bit is output on  
the SDATA pin if the data output enable bit (MDE) is set.  
6
MDE  
I2C Software Output Enable Bit (master mode only).  
Set by the user to enable the SDATA pin as an output (Tx).  
Cleared by the user to enable the SDATA pin as an input (Rx).  
I2C Software Master Clock Output Bit (master mode only).  
This bit is used to implement the SCLK for a master I2C transmitter in software. Data written to this bit is output on  
the SCLK pin.  
I2C Software Master Data Input Bit (master mode only).  
This data bit is used to implement a master I2C receiver interface in software. Data on the SDATA pin is latched into  
this bit on an SCLK transition if the data output enable (MDE) bit is 0.  
I2C Master/Slave Mode Bit.  
5
4
3
MCO  
MDI  
I2CM  
Set by the user to enable I2C software master mode.  
Cleared by the user to enable I2C hardware slave mode.  
I2C Reset Bit (slave mode only).  
2
1
0
I2CRS  
I2CTX  
I2CI  
Set by the user to reset the I2C interface.  
Cleared by the user code for normal I2C operation.  
I2C Direction Transfer Bit (slave mode only).  
Set by the MicroConverter if the I2C interface is transmitting.  
Cleared by the MicroConverter if the I2C interface is receiving.  
I2C Interrupt Bit (slave mode only).  
Set by the MicroConverter after a byte has been transmitted or received.  
Cleared by the MicroConverter when the user code reads the I2CDAT SFR. I2CI should not be cleared by user code.  
Rev. A | Page 61 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
I2CADD—I2C Address Register 1  
Function:  
Holds one of the I2C peripheral addresses for the part. It may be overwritten by user code. Application Note  
uC001 at http://www.analog.com/microconverter describes the format of the I2C standard 7-bit address.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
9BH  
55H  
No  
I2CADD1—I2C Address Register 2  
Function:  
Same as the I2CADD.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
F2H  
7FH  
No  
I2CDAT—I2C Data Register  
Function:  
The I2CDAT SFR is written to by user code to transmit data, or read by user code to read data just received by  
the I2C interface. Accessing I2CDAT automatically clears any pending I2C interrupt and the I2CI bit in the  
I2CCON SFR. User code should access I2CDAT only once per interrupt cycle.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
9AH  
00H  
No  
Software Master Mode  
The main features of the MicroConverter I2C interface are  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 can be used as an I2C  
master device by configuring the I2C peripheral in master mode  
and writing software to output the data bit-by-bit. This is  
referred to as a software master. Master mode is enabled by  
setting the I2CM bit in the I2CCON register.  
Only two bus lines are required: a serial data line (SDATA)  
and a serial clock line (SCLOCK).  
An I2C master can communicate with multiple slave  
devices. Because each slave device has a unique 7-bit  
address, single master/slave relationships can exist at all  
times even in a multislave environment.  
To transmit data on the SDATA line, MDE must be set to enable  
the output driver on the SDATA pin. If MDE is set, the SDATA  
pin is pulled high or low depending on whether the MDO bit is  
set or cleared. MCO controls the SCLOCK pin and is always  
configured as an output in master mode. In master mode, the  
SCLOCK pin is pulled high or low depending on the whether  
MCO is set or cleared.  
The ability to respond to two separate addresses when  
operating in slave mode.  
On-chip filtering rejects <50 ns spikes on the SDATA and  
the SCLOCK lines to preserve data integrity.  
To receive data, MDE must be cleared to disable the output  
driver on SDATA. Software must provide the clocks by toggling  
the MCO bit and reading the SDATA pin via the MDI bit. If  
MDE is cleared, MDI can be used to read the SDATA pin. The  
value of the SDATA pin is latched into MDI on a rising edge of  
SCLOCK. MDI is set if the SDATA pin is high on the last rising  
edge of SCLOCK. MDI is cleared if the SDATA pin is low on  
the last rising edge of SCLOCK.  
DV  
DD  
2
2
I C  
I C  
MASTER  
SLAVE 1  
2
I C  
SLAVE 2  
Figure 45. Typical I2C System  
Software must control MDO, MCO, and MDE appropriately to  
generate the start condition, slave address, acknowledge bits,  
data bytes, and stop conditions. These functions are described  
in Application Note uC001.  
Rev. A | Page 62 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Hardware Slave Mode  
The I2CTX bit contains the R/W bit sent from the master. If  
I2CTX is set, the master is ready to receive a byte; therefore the  
slave transmits data by writing to the I2CDAT register. If I2CTX  
is cleared, the master is ready to transmit a byte; therefore the  
slave receives a serial byte. Software can interrogate the state of  
I2CTX to determine whether it should write to or read from  
I2CDAT.  
After reset, the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 default to  
hardware slave mode. The I2C interface is enabled by clearing  
the SPE bit in SPICON. Slave mode is enabled by clearing the  
I2CM bit in I2CCON. The parts have a full hardware slave. In  
slave mode, the I2C address is stored in the I2CADD register.  
Data received or to be transmitted is stored in the I2CDAT  
register.  
Once the part has received a valid address, hardware holds  
SCLOCK low until the I2CI bit is cleared by software. This  
allows the master to wait for the slave to be ready before  
transmitting the clocks for the next byte.  
Once enabled in I2C slave mode, the slave controller waits for  
a start condition. If the parts detect a valid start condition,  
followed by a valid address, followed by the R/W bit, then the  
I2CI interrupt bit is automatically set by hardware. The I2C  
peripheral generates a core interrupt only if the user has pre-  
configured the I2C interrupt enable bit in the IEIP2 SFR as well  
as the global interrupt bit, EA, in the IE SFR. Therefore,  
The I2CI interrupt bit is set every time a complete data byte is  
received or transmitted, provided that it is followed by a valid  
ACK. If the byte is followed by a NACK, an interrupt is not  
generated.  
MOV IEIP2, #01h  
SETB EA  
;Enable I2C Interrupt  
The part continues to issue interrupts for each complete data  
byte transferred until a stop condition is received or the interface  
is reset.  
An autoclear of the I2CI bit is implemented on the parts so that  
this bit is cleared automatically upon read or write access to the  
I2CDAT SFR.  
When a stop condition is received, the interface resets to a state  
in which it is waiting to be addressed (idle). Similarly, if the  
interface receives a NACK at the end of a sequence, it also  
returns to the default idle state. The I2CRS bit can be used to  
reset the I2C interface. This bit can be used to force the interface  
back to the default idle state.  
MOV I2CDAT, A  
MOV A, I2CDAT  
;I2CI auto-cleared  
;I2CI auto-cleared  
If for any reason the user tries to clear the interrupt more than  
once, that is, access the data SFR more than once per interrupt,  
the I2C controller stops. The interface then must be reset by  
using the I2CRS bit.  
The user can choose to poll the I2CI bit or to enable the  
interrupt. In the case of the interrupt, the PC counter vectors to  
003BH at the end of each complete byte. For the first byte, when  
the user gets to the I2CI ISR, the 7-bit address and the R/W bit  
appear in the I2CDAT SFR.  
Rev. A | Page 63 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
MISO (Master In, Slave Out Pin)  
SPI SERIAL INTERFACE  
Pin 30 (MQFP Package), Pin 32 (CSP Package)  
The MISO pin is configured as an input line in master mode  
and an output line in slave mode. The MISO line on the master  
(data in) should be connected to the MISO line in the slave  
device (data out). The data is transferred as byte-wide (8-bit)  
serial data, MSB first.  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 integrate a complete  
hardware serial peripheral interface (SPI) interface on-chip. SPI  
is an industry-standard synchronous serial interface that allows  
8 bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and received  
simultaneously, that is, full duplex. Note that the SPI pins are  
multiplexed with the Port 2 pins (P2.0, P2.1, P2.2, and P2.3).  
These pins have SPI functionality only if SPE is set. Otherwise,  
with SPE cleared, standard Port 2 functionality is maintained.  
SPI can be configured for master or slave operation and typically  
MOSI (Master Out, Slave In Pin)  
Pin 29 (MQFP Package), Pin31 (CSP Package)  
The MOSI pin is configured as an output line in master mode  
and an input line in slave mode. The MOSI line on the master  
(data out) should be connected to the MOSI line in the slave  
device (data in). The data is transferred as byte-wide (8-bit)  
serial data, MSB first.  
consists of pins SCLOCK, MISO, MOSI, and  
.
SS  
SCLOCK (Serial Clock I/O Pin)  
Pin 28 (MQFP Package), Pin 30 (CSP Package)  
The master clock (SCLOCK) is used to synchronize the data  
transmitted and received through the MOSI and MISO data  
lines.  
(Slave Select Input Pin)  
SS  
Pin 31 (MQFP Package), Pin 33 (CSP Package)  
The pin is used only when the ADuC845/ADuC847/  
SS  
A single data bit is transmitted and received in each SCLOCK  
period. Therefore, a byte is transmitted/received after eight  
SCLOCK periods. The SCLOCK pin is configured as an output  
in master mode and as an input in slave mode. In master mode,  
the bit rate, polarity, and phase of the clock are controlled by the  
CPOL, CPHA, SPR0, and SPR1 bits in the SPICON SFR (see  
Table 41). In slave mode, the SPICON register must be configured  
with the same phase and polarity (CPHA and CPOL) as the  
master. The data is transmitted on one edge of the SCLOCK  
signal and sampled on the other.  
ADuC848 are configured in SPI slave mode. This line is active  
low. Data is received or transmitted in slave mode only when  
the pin is low, allowing the parts to be used in single-master,  
SS  
multislave SPI configurations. If CPHA = 1, the input can be  
SS  
pulled low permanently. If CPHA = 0, the input must be  
SS  
driven low before the first bit in a byte-wide transmission or  
reception and must return high again after the last bit in that  
byte-wide transmission or reception. In SPI slave mode, the  
logic level on the external pin (Pin 31/ Pin 33) can be read  
SS  
via the SPR0 bit in the SPICON SFR.  
The SFR register in Table 41 is used to control the SPI interface.  
Rev. A | Page 64 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
SPICON—SPI Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
F8H  
05H  
Yes  
Table 41. SPICON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
ISPI  
SPI Interrupt Bit.  
Set by the MicroConverter at the end of each SPI transfer.  
Cleared directly by user code or indirectly by reading the SPIDAT SFR.  
Write Collision Error Bit.  
Set by the MicroConverter if SPIDAT is written to while an SPI transfer is in progress.  
Cleared by user code.  
6
WCOL  
SPE  
5
SPI Interface Enable Bit.  
Set by user code to enable SPI functionality.  
Cleared by user code to enable standard Port 2 functionality.  
SPI Master/Slave Mode Select Bit.  
4
SPIM  
Set by user code to enable master mode operation (SCLOCK is an output).  
Cleared by user code to enable slave mode operation (SCLOCK is an input).  
Clock Polarity Bit.  
Set by user code to enable SCLOCK idle high.  
Cleared by user code to enable SCLOCK idle low.  
Clock Phase Select Bit.  
3
CPOL1  
CPHA1  
2
Set by user code if the leading SCLOCK edge is to transmit data.  
Cleared by user code if the trailing SCLOCK edge is to transmit data.  
1, 0  
SPR1, SPR0 SPI Bit-Rate Bits.  
SPR1  
SPR0  
Selected Bit Rate  
fcore/2  
fcore/4  
fcore/8  
fcore/16  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1 The CPOL and CPHA bits should both contain the same values for master and slave devices.  
Note that both SPI and I2C use the same ISR (Vector Address 3BH); therefore, when using SPI and I2C simultaneously, it is necessary to  
check the interfaces following an interrupt to determine which one caused the interrupt.  
SPIDAT: SPI Data Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
7FH  
00H  
No  
Rev. A | Page 65 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
SPI Interface—Master Mode  
USING THE SPI INTERFACE  
In master mode, the SCLOCK pin is always an output and  
generates a burst of eight clocks whenever user code writes to  
the SPIDAT register. The SCLOCK bit rate is determined by  
Depending on the configuration of the bits in the SPICON  
SFR shown in Table 41, the SPI interface transmits or receives  
data in a number of possible modes. Figure 46 shows all  
possible ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 SPI configurations  
and the timing relationships and synchronization among the  
signals involved. Also shown in this figure is the SPI interrupt  
bit (ISPI) and how it is triggered at the end of each byte-wide  
communication.  
SPR0 and SPR1 in SPICON. Also note that the pin is not  
SS  
used in master mode. If the parts need to assert the pin on an  
SS  
external slave device, a port digital output pin should be used.  
In master mode, a byte transmission or reception is initiated by  
a byte write to SPIDAT. The hardware automatically generates  
eight clock periods via the SCLOCK pin, and the data is  
transmitted via MOSI. With each SCLOCK period, a data bit is  
also sampled via MISO. After eight clocks, the transmitted byte  
is completely transmitted (via MOSI), and the input byte (if  
required) is waiting in the input shift register (after being  
received via MISO). The ISPI flag is set automatically, and an  
interrupt occurs if enabled. The value in the input shift register  
is latched into SPIDAT.  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
SS  
SAMPLE INPUT  
?
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB  
DATA OUTPUT  
(CPHA = 1)  
SPI Interface—Slave Mode  
In slave mode, the SCLOCK is an input. The pin must also be  
SS  
ISPI FLAG  
driven low externally during the byte communication. Trans-  
mission is also initiated by a write to SPIDAT. In slave mode, a  
data bit is transmitted via MISO, and a data bit is received via  
MOSI through each input SCLOCK period. After eight clocks,  
the transmitted byte is completely transmitted, and the input  
byte is waiting in the input shift register. The ISPI flag is set  
automatically, and an interrupt occurs, if enabled. The value in  
the shift register is latched into SPIDAT only when the trans-  
mission/reception of a byte has been completed. The end of  
transmission occurs after the eighth clock has been received if  
SAMPLE INPUT  
DATA OUTPUT  
MSB BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 LSB  
(CPHA = 0)  
ISPI FLAG  
Figure 46. SPI Timing, All Modes  
CPHA = 1, or when returns high if CPHA = 0.  
SS  
Rev. A | Page 66 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DPCON—Data Pointer Control SFR  
DUAL DATA POINTERS  
The parts incorporate two data pointers. The second data  
pointer is a shadow data pointer and is selected via the data  
pointer control SFR (DPCON). DPCON features automatic  
hardware post-increment and post-decrement as well as an  
automatic data pointer toggle.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
A7H  
00H  
No  
Table 42. DPCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
----  
DPT  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Data Pointer Automatic Toggle Enable.  
Cleared by the user to disable autoswapping of the DPTR.  
Set in user software to enable automatic toggling of the DPTR after each MOVX or MOVC instruction.  
5, 4  
DP1m1, DP1m0 Shadow Data Pointer Mode. These bits enable extra modes of the shadow data pointer operation, allowing  
more compact and more efficient code size and execution.  
DP1m1 DP1m0 Behavior of the Shadow Data Pointer  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
8052 behavior.  
DPTR is post-incremented after a MOVX or a MOVC instruction.  
DPTR is post-decremented after a MOVX or MOVC instruction.  
DPTR LSB is toggled after a MOVX or MOVC instruction. (This instruction can be useful for  
moving 8-bit blocks to/from 16-bit devices.)  
3, 2  
DP0m1, DP0m0 Main Data Pointer Mode. These bits enable extra modes of the main data pointer operation, allowing more  
compact and more efficient code size and execution.  
DP0m1 DP0m0 Behavior of the Main Data Pointer  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
8052 behavior.  
DPTR is post-incremented after a MOVX or a MOVC instruction.  
DPTR is post-decremented after a MOVX or MOVC instruction.  
DPTR LSB is toggled after a MOVX or MOVC instruction. (This instruction is useful for  
moving 8-bit blocks to/from 16-bit devices.)  
1
0
----  
DPSEL  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Data Pointer Select.  
Cleared by the user to select the main data pointer. This means that the contents of this 24-bit register are  
placed into the DPL, DPH, and DPP SFRs.  
Set by the user to select the shadow data pointer. This means that the contents of a separate 24-bit register  
appear in the DPL, DPH, and DPP SFRs.  
Note the following:  
MOV DPTR,#0  
;Main DPTR = 0  
The Dual Data Pointer section is the only place in which  
main and shadow data pointers are distinguished.  
Whenever the DPTR is mentioned elsewhere in this data  
sheet, active DPTR is implied.  
MOV DPCON,#55H  
;Select shadow DPTR  
;DPTR1 increment mode  
;DPTR0 increment mode  
;DPTR auto toggling ON  
Only the MOVC/MOVX @DPTR instructions  
automatically post-increment and post-decrement the  
DPTR. Other MOVC/MOVX instructions, such as MOVC  
PC or MOVC @Ri, do not cause the DPTR to automatically  
post-increment and post-decrement.  
MOV DPTR,#0D000H ;DPTR = D000H  
MOVELOOP: CLR A  
MOVC A,@A+DPTR  
;Get data  
;Post Inc DPTR  
;Swap to Main DPTR(Data)  
;Put ACC in XRAM  
MOVX @DPTR,A  
To illustrate the operation of DPCON, the following code copies  
256 bytes of code memory at Address D000H into XRAM,  
starting from Address 0000H.  
;Increment main DPTR  
;Swap Shadow DPTR(Code)  
MOV A, DPL  
JNZ MOVELOOP  
Rev. A | Page 67 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
safe supply level is well established. The supply monitor is also  
protected against spurious glitches triggering the interrupt  
circuit.  
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR  
The power supply monitor, once enabled, monitors the DVDD  
and AVDD supplies on the parts. It indicates when any of the  
supply pins drop below one of four user-selectable voltage trip  
points from 2.63 V to 4.63 V. For correct operation of the power  
supply monitor function, AVDD must be equal to or greater than  
2.63 V. Monitor function is controlled via the PSMCON SFR. If  
enabled via the IEIP2 SFR, the monitor interrupts the core by  
using the PSMI bit in the PSMCON SFR. This bit is not cleared  
until the failing power supply returns above the trip point for at  
least 250 ms.  
Note that the 5 V part has an internal POR trip level of 4.63 V,  
which means that there are no usable DVDD PSM trip levels on  
the 5 V part. The 3 V part has a POR trip level of 2.63 V  
following a reset and initialization sequence, allowing all  
relevant PSM trip points to be used.  
PSMCON—Power Supply Monitor Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
DFH  
DEH  
No  
The monitor function allows the user to save working registers  
to avoid possible data loss due to the low supply condition, and  
also ensures that normal code execution does not resume until a  
Table 43. PSMCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
CMPD  
DVDD Comparator Bit.  
This read-only bit directly reflects the state of the DVDD comparator.  
Read 1 indicates that the DVDD supply is above its selected trip point.  
Read 0 indicates that the DVDD supply is below its selected trip point.  
AVDD Comparator Bit.  
This read-only bit directly reflects the state of the AVDD comparator.  
Read 1 indicates that the AVDD supply is above its selected trip point.  
Read 0 indicates that the AVDD supply is below its selected trip point.  
Power Supply Monitor Interrupt Bit.  
6
5
CMPA  
PSMI  
Set high by the MicroConverter if either CMPA or CMPD is low, indicating low analog or digital supply. The PSMI  
bit can be used to interrupt the processor. Once CMPD and/or CMPA returns (and remains) high, a 250 ms  
counter is started. When this counter times out, the PSMI interrupt is cleared. PSMI can also be written by the  
user. However, if either comparator output is low, it is not possible for the user to clear PSMI.  
4, 3  
TPD1, TPD0  
DVDD Trip Point Selection Bits.  
A 5 V part has no valid PSM trip points. If the DVDD supply falls below the 4.63 V point, the part resets (POR). For a  
3 V part, all relevant PSM trip points are valid. The 3 V POR trip point is 2.63 V (fixed).  
These bits select the DVDD trip point voltage as follows:  
TPD1 TPD0  
Selected DVDD Trip Point (V)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4.63  
3.08  
2.93  
2.63  
2, 1  
TPA1, TPA0  
PSMEN  
AVDD Trip Point Selection Bits. These bits select the AVDD trip point voltage as follows:  
TPA1 TPA0  
Selected AVDD Trip Point (V)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4.63  
3.08  
2.93  
2.63  
0
Power Supply Monitor Enable Bit.  
Set to 1 by the user to enable the power supply monitor circuit.  
Cleared to 0 by the user to disable the power supply monitor circuit.  
Rev. A | Page 68 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
is clocked from the 32 kHz external crystal connected between  
the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins. The WDCOM SFR can be written  
only by user software if the double write sequence described in  
WDWR is initiated on every write access to the WDCON SFR.  
WATCHDOG TIMER  
The watchdog timer generates a device reset or interrupt within a  
reasonable amount of time if the ADuC845/ADuC847/  
ADuC848 enters an erroneous state, possibly due to a program-  
ming error or electrical noise. The watchdog function can be  
disabled by clearing the WDE (watchdog enable) bit in the  
watchdog control (WDCON) SFR. When enabled, the watchdog  
circuit generates a system reset or interrupt (WDS) if the user  
program fails to set the WDE bit within a predetermined amount  
of time (see the PRE3…0 bits in Table 44). The watchdog timer  
WDCON—Watchdog Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
C0H  
10H  
Yes  
Table 44. WDCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7, 6, 5, 4  
PRE3, PRE2, PRE1, PRE0 Watchdog Timer Prescale Bits.  
The watchdog timeout period is given by the equation  
tWD = (2PRE ꢀ (29/ fXTAL)) (0 ≤ PRE ≤ 7; fXTAL = 32.768 kHz)  
PRE3  
PRE2  
PRE1  
PRE0  
Timeout Period (ms)  
Action  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
15.6  
31.2  
62.5  
125  
250  
500  
1000  
2000  
0.0  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Reset or interrupt  
Immediate reset  
Reserved. Not a valid selection.  
PRE3–0 > 1000b  
Watchdog Interrupt Response Enable Bit.  
3
WDIR  
If this bit is set by the user, the watchdog generates an interrupt response instead of a system reset  
when the watchdog timeout period expires. This interrupt is not disabled by the CLR EA instruction,  
and it is also a fixed, high priority interrupt. If the watchdog timer is not being used to monitor the  
system, it can be used alternatively as a timer. The prescaler is used to set the timeout period in  
which an interrupt is generated.  
2
1
WDS  
WDE  
Watchdog Status Bit.  
Set by the watchdog controller to indicate that a watchdog timeout has occurred.  
Cleared by writing a 0 or by an external hardware reset. It is not cleared by a watchdog reset.  
Watchdog Enable Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the watchdog and clear its counters. If this bit is not set by the user within  
the watchdog timeout period, the watchdog timer generates a reset or interrupt, depending on  
WDIR.  
Cleared under the following conditions: user writes 0; watchdog reset (WDIR = 0); hardware reset;  
PSM interrupt.  
0
WDWR  
Watchdog Write Enable Bit.  
Writing data to the WDCON SFR involves a double instruction sequence. Global interrupts must first  
be disabled. The WDWR bit is set with the very next instruction, a write to the WDCON SFR. For  
example:  
CLR EA  
SETB WDWR  
;Disable Interrupts while configuring to WDT  
;Allow Write to WDCON  
MOV WDCON, #72H ;Enable WDT for 2.0s timeout  
SETB EA ;Enable Interrupts again (if required)  
Rev. A | Page 69 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Because the TIC is clocked directly from a 32 kHz external  
crystal on the parts, instructions that access the TIC registers  
are also clocked at 32 kHz (not at the core frequency). The user  
must ensure that sufficient time is given for these instructions  
to execute.  
TIME INTERVAL COUNTER (TIC)  
A TIC is provided on-chip for counting longer intervals than  
the standard 8051 compatible timers can count. The TIC is  
capable of timeout intervals ranging from 1/128 second to 255  
hours. Also, this counter is clocked by the external 32.768 kHz  
crystal rather than by the core clock, and it can remain active in  
power-down mode and time long power-down intervals. This  
has obvious applications for remote battery-powered sensors  
where regular widely spaced readings are required. Note that  
instructions to the TIC SFRs are also clocked at 32.768 kHz, so  
sufficient time must be allowed in user code for these instructions  
to execute.  
TCEN  
32.768kHz EXTERNAL CRYSTAL  
ITS0 ITS1  
8-BIT  
PRESCALER  
HUNDREDTHS COUNTER  
HTHSEC  
INTERVAL  
TIMEBASE  
SELECTION  
MUX  
Six SFRs are associated with the time interval counter, TIMECON  
being its control register. Depending on the configuration of the  
IT0 and IT1 bits in TIMECON, the selected time counter register  
overflow clocks the interval counter. When this counter is equal  
to the time interval value loaded in the INTVAL SFR, the TII bit  
(TIMECON.2) is set and generates an interrupt, if enabled. If  
the part is in power-down mode, again with TIC interrupt  
enabled, the TII bit wakes up the device and resumes code  
execution by vectoring directly to the TIC interrupt service  
vector address at 0053H. The TIC-related SFRs are described in  
Table 45. Note also that the time based SFRs can be written  
initially with the current time; the TIC can then be controlled  
and accessed by user software. In effect, this facilitates the  
implementation of a real-time clock. A basic block diagram of  
the TIC is shown in Figure 47.  
TIEN  
SECOND COUNTER  
SEC  
MINUTE COUNTER  
MIN  
HOUR COUNTER  
HOUR  
8-BIT  
INTERVAL COUNTER  
INTERVAL TIMEOUT  
TIME INTERVAL COUNTER INTERRUPT  
EQUAL?  
INTVAL SFR  
Figure 47. TIC Simplified Block Diagram  
Rev. A | Page 70 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
TIMECON—TIC Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
A1H  
00H  
No  
Table 45. TIMECON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
----  
TFH  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Twenty-Four Hour Select Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the hour counter to count from 0 to 23.  
Cleared by the user to enable the hour counter to count from 0 to 255.  
Interval Timebase Selection Bits.  
5, 4  
ITS1, ITS0  
ITS1 ITS0  
Interval Timebase  
1/128 Second  
Seconds  
Minutes  
Hours  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
3
ST1  
Single Time Interval Bit.  
Set by the user to generate a single interval timeout. If set, a timeout clears the TIEN bit.  
Cleared by the user to allow the interval counter to be automatically reloaded and start counting again at each  
interval timeout.  
2
1
0
TII  
TIC Interrupt Bit.  
Set when the 8-bit interval counter matches the value in the INTVAL SFR.  
Cleared by user software.  
Time Interval Enable Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the 8-bit time interval counter.  
Cleared by the user to disable the interval counter.  
Time Clock Enable Bit.  
TIEN  
TCEN  
Set by the user to enable the time clock to the time interval counters.  
Cleared by the user to disable the clock to the time interval counters and reset the time interval SFRs to the last  
value written to them by the user. The time registers (HTHSEC, SEC, MIN, and HOUR) can be written while TCEN is  
low.  
Rev. A | Page 71 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
INTVAL—User Timer Interval Select Register  
Function:  
User code writes the required time interval to this register. When the 8-bit interval counter is equal to the time interval  
value loaded in the INTVAL SFR, the TII bit (TIMECON.2) is set and generates an interrupt, if enabled.  
SFR Address:  
A6H  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
Valid Value:  
00H  
No  
0 to 255 decimal  
HTHSEC—Hundredths of Seconds Time Register  
Function:  
This register is incremented in 1/128-second intervals once TCEN in TIMECON is active. The HTHSEC SFR counts  
from 0 to 127 before rolling over to increment the SEC time register.  
SFR Address:  
A2H  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
Valid Value:  
00H  
No  
0 to 127 decimal  
SEC—Seconds Time Register  
Function:  
This register is incremented in 1-second intervals once TCEN in TIMECON is active. The SEC SFR counts from 0 to 59  
before rolling over to increment the MIN time register.  
SFR Address:  
A3H  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
Valid Value:  
00H  
No  
0 to 59 decimal  
MIN—Minutes Time Register  
Function  
This register is incremented in 1-minute intervals once TCEN in TIMECON is active. The MIN SFR counts from 0 to 59  
before rolling over to increment the HOUR time register.  
SFR Address:  
A4H  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
Valid Value:  
00H  
No  
0 to 59 decimal  
HOUR—Hours Time Register  
Function:  
This register is incremented in 1-hour intervals once TCEN in TIMECON is active. The HOUR SFR counts from 0 to 23  
before rolling over to 0.  
SFR Address:  
A5H  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
Valid Value:  
00H  
No  
0 to 23 decimal  
To enable the TIC as a real-time clock, the HOUR, MIN, SEC, and HTHSEC registers can be loaded with the current time. Once the  
TCEN bit is high, the TIC starts. To use the TIC as a time interval counter, select the count interval—hundredths of seconds, seconds,  
minutes, and hours via the ITS0 and ITS1 bits in the TIMECON SFR. Load the count required into the INTVAL SFR.  
Note that INTVAL is only an 8-bit register, so user software must take into account any intervals longer than are possible with 8 bits.  
Therefore, to count an interval of 20 seconds, use the following procedure:  
MOV TIMECON, #0D0H ;Enable 24Hour mode, count seconds, Clear TCEN.  
MOV INTVAL, #14H ;Load INTVAL with required count interval...in this case 14H = 20  
MOV TIMECON, #0D3H ;Start TIC counting and enable the 8bit INTVAL counter.  
Rev. A | Page 72 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
In general-purpose I/O port mode, Port 0 pins that have 1s  
written to them via the Port 0 SFR are configured as open-drain  
and, therefore, float. In this state, Port 0 pins can be used as high  
impedance inputs. This is represented in Figure 48 by the NAND  
gate whose output remains high as long as the control signal is  
low, thereby disabling the top FET. External pull-up resistors  
are, therefore, required when Port 0 pins are used as general-  
purpose outputs. Port 0 pins with 0s written to them drive a  
logic low output voltage (VOL) and are capable of sinking 1.6 mA.  
8052 COMPATIBLE ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS  
This section gives a brief overview of the various secondary  
peripheral circuits that are available to the user on-chip. These  
features are mostly 8052 compatible (with a few additional  
features) and are controlled via standard 8052 SFR bit definitions.  
Parallel I/O  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 use four input/output  
ports to exchange data with external devices. In addition to  
performing general-purpose I/O, some are capable of external  
memory operations, while others are multiplexed with alternate  
functions for the peripheral functions available on-chip. In  
general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin cannot be used as  
a general-purpose I/O pin.  
Port 1  
Port 1 is also an 8-bit port directly controlled via the P1 SFR  
(90H). Port 1 digital output capability is not supported on this  
device. Port 1 pins can be configured as digital inputs or analog  
inputs. By (power-on) default, these pins are configured as  
analog inputs, that is, 1 is written to the corresponding Port 1  
register bit. To configure any of these pins as digital inputs, the  
user should write a 0 to these port bits to configure the corre-  
sponding pin as a high impedance digital input. These pins also  
have various secondary functions aside from their analog input  
capability, as described in Table 46.  
Port 0  
Port 0 is an 8-bit open-drain bidirectional I/O port that is  
directly controlled via the Port 0 SFR (80H). Port 0 is also the  
multiplexed low-order address and data bus during accesses to  
external data memory.  
Figure 48 shows a typical bit latch and I/O buffer for a Port 0  
pin. The bit latch (one bit in the ports SFR) is represented as a  
Type D flip-flop, which clocks in a value from the internal bus  
in response to a write to latch signal from the CPU. The  
Q output of the flip-flop is placed on the internal bus in  
response to a read latch signal from the CPU. The level of the  
port pin itself is placed on the internal bus in response to a read  
pin signal from the CPU. Some instructions that read a port  
activate the read latch signal, and others activate the read pin  
signal. See the Read-Modify-Write Instructions section for  
details.  
Table 46. Port 1 Alternate Functions  
Pin No. Alternate Function  
P1.2  
P1.3  
P1.6  
P1.7  
REFIN2+ (second reference input, +’ve)  
REFIN2− (second reference input, –‘ve)  
IEXC1 (200 µA excitation current source)  
IEXC2 (200 µA excitation current source)  
READ  
LATCH  
INTERNAL  
BUS  
D
Q
Q
WRITE  
TO LATCH  
ADDR/DATA  
CONTROL  
DV  
DD  
CL  
LATCH  
READ  
P1.x  
PIN  
READ  
PIN  
LATCH  
TO ADC  
P0.x  
PIN  
INTERNAL  
BUS  
Figure 49. Port 1 Bit Latch and I/O Buffer  
D
Q
Q
Port 2  
WRITE  
TO LATCH  
CL  
Port 2 is a bidirectional port with internal pull-up resistors  
directly controlled via the P2 SFR. Port 2 also emits the middle-  
and high-order address bytes during accesses to the 24-bit  
external data memory space.  
LATCH  
READ  
PIN  
Figure 48. Port 0 Bit Latch and I/O Buffer  
In general-purpose I/O port mode, Port 2 pins that have 1s  
written to them are pulled high by the internal pull-ups as  
shown in Figure 50 and, in that state, can be used as inputs. As  
inputs, Port 2 pins pulled externally low source current because  
of the internal pull-up resistors. Port 2 pins with 0s written to  
them drive a logic low output voltage (VOL) and are capable of  
sinking 1.6 mA.  
As shown in Figure 48, the output drivers of Port 0 pins are  
switchable to an internal ADDR and ADDR/DATA bus by an  
internal control signal for use in external memory accesses.  
During external memory accesses, the P0 SFR has 1s written to  
it; therefore, all its bit latches become 1. When accessing  
external memory, the control signal in Figure 48 goes high,  
enabling push-pull operation of the output pin from the internal  
address or data bus (ADDR/DATA line). Therefore, no external  
pull-ups are required on Port 0 for it to access external memory.  
Rev. A | Page 73 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DV  
DD  
P2.5 and P2.6 can also be used as PWM outputs, while P2.7 can  
act as an alternate PWM clock source. When selected as the  
PWM outputs, they overwrite anything written to P2.5 or P2.6.  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
FUNCTION  
INTERNAL  
PULL-UP  
READ  
LATCH  
P3.x  
PIN  
Table 47. Port 2 Alternate Functions  
Pin No. Alternate Function  
INTERNAL  
BUS  
D
Q
Q
WRITE  
TO LATCH  
CL  
P2.0  
P2.1  
P2.2  
P2.3  
P2.4  
P2.5  
P2.6  
P2.7  
SCLOCK for SPI  
MOSI for SPI  
MISO for SPI  
SS and T2 clock input  
T2EX alternate control for T2  
PWM0 output  
LATCH  
READ  
PIN  
ALTERNATE  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
Figure 51. Port 3 Bit Latch and I/O Buffer  
PWM1 output  
PWMCLK  
Read-Modify-Write Instructions  
Some 8051 instructions read the latch while others read the pin.  
The instructions that read the latch rather than the pins are the  
ones that read a value, possibly change it, and rewrite it to the  
latch. These are called read-modify-write instructions, which  
are listed in Table 49. When the destination operand is a port or  
a port bit, these instructions read the latch rather than the pin.  
ADDR  
READ  
LATCH  
DV  
DD  
DV  
DD  
CONTROL  
INTERNAL  
PULL-UP  
INTERNAL  
BUS  
D
Q
Q
P2.x  
PIN  
WRITE  
TO LATCH  
Table 49. Read-Modify-Write Instructions  
CL  
LATCH  
Instruction  
Description  
READ  
PIN  
ANL  
ORL  
XRL  
Logical AND, for example, ANL P1, A  
Logical OR, for example, ORL P2, A  
Logical EX-OR, for example, XRL P3, A  
Figure 50. Port 2 Bit Latch and I/O Buffer  
Port 3  
JBC  
Jump if Bit = 1 and clear bit, for example, JBC  
P1.1, LABEL  
Complement bit, for example, CPL P3.0  
Increment, for example, INC P2  
Decrement, for example, DEC P2  
Decrement and jump if not zero, for example,  
DJNZ P3, LABEL  
Port 3 is a bidirectional port with internal pull-ups directly  
controlled via the P3 SFR (B0H). Port 3 pins that have 1s  
written to them are pulled high by the internal pull-ups and, in  
that state, can be used as inputs. As inputs, Port 3 pins pulled  
externally low source current because of the internal pull-ups.  
CPL  
INC  
DEC  
DJNZ  
MOV PX.Y, C1  
CLR PX.Y1  
Move Carry to Bit Y of Port X  
Clear Bit Y of Port X  
Set Bit Y of Port X  
Port 3 pins with 0s written to them drive a logic low output  
voltage (VOL) and are capable of sinking 4 mA. Port 3 pins also  
have various secondary functions as described in Table 48. The  
alternate functions of Port 3 pins can be activated only if the  
corresponding bit latch in the P3 SFR contains a 1. Otherwise,  
the port pin remains at 0.  
SETB PX.Y1  
___________________________________________  
1 These instructions read the port byte (all 8 bits), modify the addressed bit,  
and write the new byte back to the latch.  
Read-modify-write instructions are directed to the latch rather  
than to the pin to avoid a possible misinterpretation of the  
voltage level of a pin. For example, a port pin might be used to  
drive the base of a transistor. When 1 is written to the bit, the  
transistor is turned on. If the CPU reads the same port bit at the  
pin rather than the latch, it reads the base voltage of the  
transistor and interprets it as Logic 0. Reading the latch rather  
than the pin returns the correct value of 1.  
Table 48. Port 3 Alternate Functions  
Pin No. Alternate Function  
P3.0  
P3.1  
P3.2  
P3.3  
P3.4  
P3.5  
P3.6  
P3.7  
RxD (UART input pin, or serial data I/O in Mode 0)  
TxD (UART output pin, or serial clock output in Mode 0)  
INT0 (External Interrupt 0)  
INT1 (External Interrupt 1)  
T0 (Timer/Counter 0 external input)  
T1 (Timer/Counter 1 external input)  
WR (external data memory write strobe)  
RD (external data memory read strobe)  
Rev. A | Page 74 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
When functioning as a counter, the TLx register is incremented  
by a 1-to-0 transition at its corresponding external input pin:  
T0, T1, or T2. When the samples show a high in one cycle and a  
low in the next cycle, the count is incremented. Because it takes  
two machine cycles (two core clock periods) to recognize a  
1-to-0 transition, the maximum count rate is half the core clock  
frequency.  
TIMERS/COUNTERS  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 have three 16-bit timer/  
counters: Timer 0, Timer 1, and Timer 2. The timer/counter  
hardware is included on-chip to relieve the processor core of the  
overhead inherent in implementing timer/counter functionality  
in software. Each timer/counter consists of two 8-bit registers:  
THx and TLx (x = 0, 1, or 2). All three can be configured to  
operate either as timers or as event counters.  
There are no restrictions on the duty cycle of the external input  
signal, but, to ensure that a given level is sampled at least once  
before it changes, it must be held for a minimum of one full  
machine cycle. User configuration and control of all timer  
operating modes is achieved via three SFRs:  
When functioning as a timer, the TLx register is incremented  
every machine cycle. Thus, one can think of it as counting  
machine cycles. Because a machine cycle on a single-cycle core  
consists of one core clock period, the maximum count rate is  
the core clock frequency.  
TMOD, TCON—Control and Configuration for Timers 0 and 1.  
T2CON—Control and Configuration for Timer 2.  
TMOD—Timer/Counter 0 and 1 Mode Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
89H  
00H  
No  
Table 50. TMOD SFR Bit Designation  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
Gate  
Timer 1 Gating Control.  
Set by software to enable Timer/Counter 1 only while the INT1 pin is high and the TR1 control is set.  
Cleared by software to enable Timer 1 whenever the TR1control bit is set.  
Timer 1 Timer or Counter Select Bit.  
6
C/T  
Set by software to select counter operation (input from T1 pin).  
Cleared by software to select the timer operation (input from internal system clock).  
Timer 1 Mode Select bits  
5, 4  
M1, M0  
M1  
M0  
Description  
0
0
1
0
1
0
TH1 operates as an 8-bit timer/counter. TL1 serves as 5-bit prescaler.  
16-Bit Timer/Counter. TH1 and TL1 are cascaded; there is no prescaler.  
8-Bit Autoreload Timer/Counter. TH1 holds a value that is to be reloaded into TL1 each time it  
overflows.  
1
1
Timer/Counter 1 Stopped.  
3
Gate  
C/T  
Timer 0 Gating Control.  
Set by software to enable Timer/Counter 0 only while the INT0 pin is high and the TR0 control bit is set.  
Cleared by software to enable Timer 0 whenever the TR0 control bit is set.  
Timer 0 Timer or Counter Select Bit.  
2
Set by software to the select counter operation (input from T0 pin).  
Cleared by software to the select timer operation (input from internal system clock).  
Timer 0 Mode Select Bits  
1, 0  
M1, M0  
M1  
0
0
M0  
0
1
Description  
TH0 operates as an 8-bit timer/counter. TL0 serves as a 5-bit prescaler.  
16-Bit Timer/Counter. TH0 and TL0 are cascaded; there is no prescaler.  
1
0
8-Bit Autoreload Timer/Counter. TH0 holds a value that is to be reloaded into TL0 each time it  
overflows.  
1
1
TL0 is an 8-bit timer/counter controlled by the standard Timer 0 control bits.  
TH0 is an 8-bit timer only, controlled by Timer 1 control bits.  
Rev. A | Page 75 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
TCON—Timer/Counter 0 and 1 Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
88H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 51. TCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
TF1  
Timer 1 Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware on a Timer/Counter 1 overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when the program counter (PC) vectors to the interrupt service routine.  
Timer 1 Run Control Bit.  
Set by the user to turn on Timer/Counter 1.  
Cleared by the user to turn off Timer/Counter 1.  
Timer 0 Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware on a Timer/Counter 0 overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine.  
Timer 0 Run Control Bit.  
Set by the user to turn on Timer/Counter 0.  
Cleared by the user to turn off Timer/Counter 0.  
External Interrupt 1 (INT1) Flag.  
6
5
4
3
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE11  
Set by hardware by a falling edge or by a zero level applied to the external interrupt pin, INT1, depending on the  
state of Bit IT1.  
Cleared by hardware when the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine only if the interrupt was transition-  
activated. If level-activated, the external requesting source controls the request flag rather than the on-chip  
hardware.  
2
1
IT11  
IE01  
External Interrupt 1 (IE1) Trigger Type.  
Set by software to specify edge-sensitive detection, that is, 1-to-0 transition.  
Cleared by software to specify level-sensitive detection, that is, zero level.  
External Interrupt 0 (INT0) Flag.  
Set by hardware by a falling edge or by a zero level being applied to the external interrupt pin, INT0, depending on  
the statue of Bit IT0.  
Cleared by hardware when the PC vectors to the interrupt service routine only if the interrupt was transition-  
activated. If level-activated, the external requesting source controls the request flag rather than the on-chip  
hardware.  
0
IT01  
External Interrupt 0 (IE0) Trigger Type.  
Set by software to specify edge-sensitive detection, that is, 1-to-0 transition.  
Cleared by software to specify level-sensitive detection, that is, zero level.  
___________________________________________  
1
INT0  
INT1  
interrupt pins.  
These bits are not used to control Timer/Counters 0 and 1, but are used instead to control and monitor the external  
and  
Timer/Counter 0 and 1 Data Registers  
Each timer consists of two 8-bit registers. These can be used as independent registers or combined into a single 16-bit register, depending  
on the timers’ mode configuration.  
TH0 and TL0—Timer 0 high and low bytes.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
8CH and 8AH, respectively.  
00H and 00H, respectively.  
TH1 and TL1—Timer 1 high and low bytes.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
8DH and 8BH, respectively.  
00H and 00H, respectively  
Rev. A | Page 76 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Timer/Counter 0 and 1 Operating Modes  
Mode 2 (8-Bit Timer/Counter with Autoreload)  
This section describes the operating modes for Timer/Counters  
0 and 1. Unless otherwise noted, these modes of operation are  
the same for both Timer 0 and Timer 1.  
Mode 2 configures the timer register as an 8-bit counter (TL0)  
with automatic reload as shown in Figure 54. Overflow from  
TL0 not only sets TF0, but also reloads TL0 with the contents of  
TH0, which is preset by software. The reload leaves TH0  
unchanged.  
Mode 0 (13-Bit Timer/Counter)  
Mode 0 configures an 8-bit timer/counter. Figure 52 shows  
Mode 0 operation. Note that the divide-by-12 prescaler is not  
present on the single-cycle core.  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T = 0  
INTERRUPT  
TL0  
TF0  
(8 BITS)  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T = 1  
P3.4/T0  
C/T = 0  
INTERRUPT  
CONTROL  
TR0  
TL0  
TH0  
TF0  
(5 BITS) (8 BITS)  
C/T = 1  
P3.4/T0  
RELOAD  
GATE  
TH0  
CONTROL  
(8 BITS)  
P3.2/INT0  
TR0  
*
THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
GATE  
Figure 54. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 2  
P3.2/INT0  
Mode 3 (Two 8-Bit Timer/Counters)  
*
THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
Mode 3 has different effects on Timer 0 and Timer 1. Timer 1 in  
Mode 3 simply holds its count. The effect is the same as setting  
TR1 = 0. Timer 0 in Mode 3 establishes TL0 and TH0 as two  
separate counters. This configuration is shown in Figure 55. TL0  
Figure 52. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 0  
In this mode, the timer register is configured as a 13-bit register.  
As the count rolls over from all 1s to all 0s, it sets the timer  
overflow flag, TF0. TF0 can then be used to request an interrupt.  
The counted input is enabled to the timer when TR0 = 1 and  
uses the Timer 0 control bits C/ , Gate, TR0,  
, and TF0.  
T
INT0  
TH0 is locked into a timer function (counting machine cycles)  
and takes over the use of TR1 and TF1 from Timer 1. Therefore,  
TH0 then controls the Timer 1 interrupt. Mode 3 is provided  
for applications requiring an extra 8-bit timer or counter.  
either Gate = 0 or  
= 1. Setting Gate = 1 allows the timer to  
INT0  
be controlled by external input  
to facilitate pulse-width  
INT0  
measurements. TR0 is a control bit in the special function  
register TCON; Gate is in TMOD. The 13-bit register consists of  
all 8 bits of TH0 and the lower 5 bits of TL0. The upper 3 bits of  
TL0 are indeterminate and should be ignored. Setting the run  
flag (TR0) does not clear the registers.  
When Timer 0 is in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be turned on and off  
by switching it out of and into its own Mode 3, or it can still be  
used by the serial interface as a baud rate generator. In fact, it  
can be used in any application not requiring an interrupt from  
Timer 1 itself.  
Mode 1 (16-Bit Timer/Counter)  
Mode 1 is the same as Mode 0 except that the Mode 1 timer  
register runs with all 16 bits. Mode 1 is shown in Figure 53.  
CORE  
CLK/12  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T = 0  
C/T = 1  
INTERRUPT  
TL0  
(8 BITS)  
TF0  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T = 0  
INTERRUPT  
P3.4/T0  
TL0  
TH0  
TF0  
(8 BITS) (8 BITS)  
CONTROL  
TR0  
C/T = 1  
P3.4/T0  
CONTROL  
GATE  
TR0  
P3.2/INT0  
GATE  
INTERRUPT  
P3.2/INT0  
TH0  
(8 BITS)  
CORE  
CLK/12  
TF1  
*
THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
TR1  
Figure 53. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 1  
*
THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
Figure 55. Timer/Counter 0, Mode 3  
Rev. A | Page 77 of 108  
 
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
T2CON—Timer/Counter 2 Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
C8H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 52. T2CON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name Description  
7
TF2  
Timer 2 Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware on a Timer 2 overflow. TF2 cannot be set when either RCLK = 1 or TCLK = 1.  
Cleared by user software.  
6
5
4
3
EXF2  
RCLK  
TCLK  
Timer 2 External Flag.  
Set by hardware when either a capture or reload is caused by a negative transition on T2EX and EXEN2 = 1.  
Cleared by user software.  
Receive Clock Enable Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its receive clock in serial port Modes 1 and 3.  
Cleared by the user to enable Timer 1 overflow to be used for the receive clock.  
Transmit Clock Enable Bit.  
Set by the user to enable the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its transmit clock in serial port Modes 1 and 3.  
Cleared by the user to enable Timer 1 overflow to be used for the transmit clock.  
EXEN2 Timer 2 External Enable Flag.  
Set by the user to enable a capture or reload to occur as a result of a negative transition on T2EX if Timer 2 is not being  
used to clock the serial port.  
Cleared by the user for Timer 2 to ignore events at T2EX.  
Timer 2 Start/Stop Control Bit.  
Set by the user to start Timer 2.  
2
1
0
TR2  
Cleared by the user to stop Timer 2.  
CNT2  
CAP2  
Timer 2 Timer or Counter Function Select Bit.  
Set by the user to select the counter function (input from external T2 pin).  
Cleared by the user to select the timer function (input from on-chip core clock).  
Timer 2 Capture/Reload Select Bit.  
Set by the user to enable captures on negative transitions at T2EX if EXEN2 = 1.  
Cleared by the user to enable autoreloads with Timer 2 overflows or negative transitions at T2EX when EXEN2 = 1.  
When either RCLK = 1 or TCLK = 1, this bit is ignored and the timer is forced to autoreload on Timer 2 overflow.  
Timer/Counter 2 Data Registers  
Timer/Counter 2 also has two pairs of 8-bit data registers  
associated with it. These are used as both timer data registers  
and as timer capture/reload registers.  
TH2 and TL2—Timer 2 data high byte and low byte.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
CDH and CCH respectively.  
00H and 00H, respectively.  
RCAP2H and RCAP2L—Timer 2 capture/reload byte and low  
byte.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
CBH and CAH, respectively.  
00H and 00H, respectively.  
Rev. A | Page 78 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Timer/Counter 2 Operating Modes  
16-Bit Capture Mode  
The following sections describe the operating modes for  
Timer/Counter 2. The operating modes are selected by bits in  
the T2CON SFR as shown in Table 53.  
Capture mode has two options that are selected by Bit EXEN2  
in T2CON. If EXEN2 = 0, Timer 2 is a 16-bit timer or counter  
that, upon overflowing, sets bit TF2, the Timer 2 overflow bit,  
which can be used to generate an interrupt. If EXEN2 = 1,  
Timer 2 still performs the above, but a l-to-0 transition on  
external input T2EX causes the current value in the Timer 2  
registers, TL2 and TH2, to be captured into registers RCAP2L  
and RCAP2H, respectively. In addition, the transition at T2EX  
causes bit EXF2 in T2CON to be set, and EXF2, like TF2, can  
generate an interrupt. Capture mode is shown in Figure 57. The  
baud rate generator mode is selected by RCLK = 1 and/or  
TCLK = 1.  
Table 53. T2CON Operating Modes  
RCLK (or) TCLK  
CAP2  
TR2  
Mode  
0
0
1
X
0
1
X
X
1
1
1
0
16-Bit Autoreload  
16-Bit Capture  
Baud Rate  
Off  
16-Bit Autoreload Mode  
Autoreload mode has two options that are selected by bit  
EXEN2 in T2CON. If EXEN2 = 0, when Timer 2 rolls over, it  
not only sets TF2 but also causes the Timer 2 registers to be  
reloaded with the 16-bit value in registers RCAP2L and  
RCAP2H, which are preset by software. If EXEN2 = 1, Timer 2  
still performs the above, but with the added feature that a 1-to-0  
transition at external input T2EX also triggers the 16-bit reload  
and sets EXF2. Autoreload mode is shown in Figure 56.  
In either case, if Timer 2 is used to generate the baud rate, the  
TF2 interrupt flag does not occur. Therefore, Timer 2 interrupts  
do not occur, so they do not have to be disabled. In this mode,  
the EXF2 flag can, however, still cause interrupts, which can be  
used as a third external interrupt. Baud rate generation is  
described as part of the UART serial port operation in the  
following section.  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T2 = 0  
C/T2 = 1  
TL2  
(8 BITS)  
TH2  
(8 BITS)  
T2  
PIN  
CONTROL  
RELOAD  
TR2  
TRANSITION  
DETECTOR  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
TF2  
TIMER  
INTERRUPT  
T2EX  
PIN  
EXF2  
CONTROL  
EXEN2  
*THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
Figure 56. Timer/Counter 2, 16-Bit Autoreload Mode  
CORE  
CLK*  
C/T2 = 0  
C/T2 = 1  
TL2  
(8 BITS)  
TH2  
(8 BITS)  
TF2  
T2  
PIN  
CONTROL  
TR2  
TIMER  
INTERRUPT  
CAPTURE  
TRANSITION  
DETECTOR  
RCAP2L  
RCAP2H  
T2EX  
PIN  
EXF2  
CONTROL  
EXEN2  
THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
*
Figure 57. Timer/Counter 2, 16-Bit Capture Mode  
Rev. A | Page 79 of 108  
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
SBUF SFR  
UART SERIAL INTERFACE  
Both the serial port receive and transmit registers are accessed  
through the SBUF SFR (SFR address = 99H). Writing to SBUF  
loads the transmit register, and reading SBUF accesses a  
physically separate receive register.  
The serial port is full duplex, meaning that it can transmit and  
receive simultaneously. It is also receive buffered, meaning that  
it can begin receiving a second byte before a previously received  
byte is read from the receive register. However, if the first byte is  
still not read by the time reception of the second byte is complete,  
the first byte is lost. The physical interface to the serial data  
network is via Pins RxD(P3.0) and TxD(P3.1), while the SFR  
interface to the UART comprises SBUF and SCON, as described  
below.  
SCON UART—Serial Port Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
98H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 54. SCON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7, 6  
SM0, SM1  
UART Serial Mode Select Bits. These bits select the serial port operating mode as follows:  
SM0  
SM1  
Selected Operating Mode.  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Mode 0: Shift register, fixed baud rate (Core_Clk/2).  
Mode 1: 8-bit UART, variable baud rate.  
Mode 2: 9-bit UART, fixed baud rate (Core_Clk/32) or (Core_Clk/16).  
Mode 3: 9-bit UART, variable baud rate.  
5
SM2  
Multiprocessor Communication Enable Bit.  
Enables multiprocessor communication in Modes 2 and 3.  
In Mode 0, SM2 should be cleared.  
In Mode 1, if SM2 is set, RI is not activated if a valid stop bit was not received. If SM2 is cleared, RI is set as soon as  
the byte of data is received.  
In Modes 2 or 3, if SM2 is set, RI is not activated if the received ninth data bit in RB8 is 0.  
If SM2 is cleared, RI is set as soon as the byte of data is received.  
Serial Port Receive Enable Bit.  
Set by user software to enable serial port reception.  
Serial Port Transmit (Bit 9).  
4
3
REN  
TB8  
The data loaded into TB8 is the ninth data bit transmitted in Modes 2 and 3. Cleared by user software to disable  
serial port reception.  
2
1
RB8  
TI  
Serial Port Receiver Bit 9.  
The ninth data bit received in Modes 2 and 3 is latched into RB8. For Mode 1, the stop bit is latched into RB8.  
Serial Port Transmit Interrupt Flag.  
Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit in Mode 0, or at the beginning of the stop bit in Modes 1, 2, and 3.  
TI must be cleared by user software.  
0
RI  
Serial Port Receive Interrupt Flag.  
Set by hardware at the end of the eighth bit in Mode 0, or halfway through the stop bit in Modes 1, 2, and 3.  
RI must be cleared by software.  
SBUF—UART Serial Port Data Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
99H  
00H  
No  
Rev. A | Page 80 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mode 0 (8-Bit Shift Register Mode)  
All of the following conditions must be met at the time the final  
shift pulse is generated:  
Mode 0 is selected by clearing both the SM0 and SM1 bits in the  
SFR SCON. Serial data enters and exits through RxD. TxD  
outputs the shift clock. Eight data bits are transmitted or  
received. Transmission is initiated by any instruction that writes  
to SBUF. The data is shifted out of the RxD line. The 8 bits are  
transmitted with the least significant bit (LSB) first.  
RI = 0  
Either SM2 = 0 or SM2 = 1  
Received stop bit = 1  
If any of these conditions is not met, the received frame is  
irretrievably lost, and RI is not set.  
Reception is initiated when the receive enable bit (REN) is 1  
and the receive interrupt bit (RI) is 0. When RI is cleared, the  
data is clocked into the RxD line, and the clock pulses are  
output from the TxD line as shown in Figure 58.  
Mode 2 (9-Bit UART with Fixed Baud Rate)  
Mode 2 is selected by setting SM0 and clearing SM1. In this  
mode, the UART operates in 9-bit mode with a fixed baud rate.  
The baud rate is fixed at Core_Clk/64 by default, although by  
setting the SMOD bit in PCON, the frequency can be doubled  
to Core_Clk/32. Eleven bits are transmitted or received: a start  
bit (0), 8 data bits, a programmable 9th bit, and a stop bit (1).  
The 9th bit is most often used as a parity bit, although it can be  
used for anything, including a ninth data bit if required.  
RxD  
(DATA OUT)  
DATA BIT 0  
DATA BIT 1  
DATA BIT 6  
DATA BIT 7  
TxD  
(SHIFT CLOCK)  
Figure 58. 8-Bit Shift Register Mode  
Mode 1 (8-Bit UART, Variable Baud Rate)  
Mode 1 is selected by clearing SM0 and setting SM1. Each data  
byte (LSB first) is preceded by a start bit (0) and followed by a  
stop bit (1). Therefore, 10 bits are transmitted on TxD or are  
received on RxD. The baud rate is set by the Timer 1 or Timer 2  
overflow rate, or a combination of the two (one for transmission  
and the other for reception).  
To transmit, the 8 data bits must be written into SBUF. The  
ninth bit must be written to TB8 in SCON. When transmission  
is initiated, the 8 data bits (from SBUF) are loaded into the  
transmit shift register (LSB first). The contents of TB8 are  
loaded into the 9th bit position of the transmit shift register.  
The transmission starts at the next valid baud rate clock. The TI  
flag is set as soon as the stop bit appears on TxD.  
Transmission is initiated by writing to SBUF. The write to SBUF  
signal also loads a 1 (stop bit) into the 9th bit position of the  
transmit shift register. The data is output bit-by-bit until the  
stop bit appears on TxD and the transmit interrupt flag (TI) is  
automatically set as shown in Figure 59.  
Reception for Mode 2 is similar to that of Mode 1. The 8 data  
bytes are input at RxD (LSB first) and loaded onto the receive  
shift register. When all 8 bits have been clocked in, the following  
events occur:  
STOP BIT  
START  
BIT  
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4  
D5 D6  
D7  
TxD  
The 8 bits in the receive shift register are latched into SBUF.  
The 9th data bit is latched into RB8 in SCON.  
The receiver interrupt flag (RI) is set.  
TI  
(SCON.1)  
SET INTERRUPT  
I.E., READY FOR MORE DATA  
Figure 59. 8-Bit Variable Baud Rate  
All of the following conditions must be met at the time the final  
shift pulse is generated:  
Reception is initiated when a 1-to-0 transition is detected on  
RxD. Assuming that a valid start bit is detected, character  
reception continues. The start bit is skipped and the 8 data bits  
are clocked into the serial port shift register. When all 8 bits  
have been clocked in, the following events occur:  
RI = 0  
Either SM2 = 0 or SM2 = 1  
Received stop bit = 1  
The 8 bits in the receive shift register are latched into SBUF.  
The 9th bit (stop bit) is clocked into RB8 in SCON.  
The receiver interrupt flag (RI) is set.  
If any of these conditions is not met, the received frame is  
irretrievably lost, and RI is not set.  
Rev. A | Page 81 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Mode 3 (9-Bit UART with Variable Baud Rate)  
The Timer 1 interrupt should be disabled in this application.  
The timer itself can be configured for either timer or counter  
operation, and in any of its three running modes. In the most  
typical application, it is configured for timer operation in  
autoreload mode (high nibble of TMOD = 0010 binary). In that  
case, the baud rate is given by the formula  
Mode 3 is selected by setting both SM0 and SM1. In this mode,  
the 8051 UART serial port operates in 9-bit mode with a variable  
baud rate determined by either Timer 1 or Timer 2. The opera-  
tion of the 9-bit UART is the same as for Mode 2, but the baud  
rate can be varied as for Mode 1.  
2SMOD Core Clock Frequency  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate =  
×
In all four modes, transmission is initiated by any instruction  
that uses SBUF as a destination register. Reception is initiated in  
Mode 0 when RI = 0 and REN = 1. Reception is initiated in the  
other modes by the incoming start bit if REN = 1.  
32  
(256 TH1)  
Timer 2 Generated Baud Rates  
Baud rates can also be generated by using Timer 2. Using Timer 2  
is similar to using Timer 1 in that the timer must overflow 16  
times before a bit is transmitted or received. Because Timer 2  
has a 16-bit autoreload mode, a wider range of baud rates is  
possible.  
UART Serial Port Baud Rate Generation  
Mode 0 Baud Rate Generation  
The baud rate in Mode 0 is fixed:  
Core Clock Frequency  
1
Mode 0 Baud Rate =  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate =  
× Timer 2 Overflow Rate  
12  
16  
Therefore, when Timer 2 is used to generate baud rates, the  
timer increments every two clock cycles rather than every core  
machine cycle as before. It increments six times faster than  
Timer 1, and, therefore, baud rates six times faster are possible.  
Because Timer 2 has 16-bit autoreload capability, very low baud  
rates are still possible.  
Mode 2 Baud Rate Generation  
The baud rate in Mode 2 depends on the value of the SMOD bit  
in the PCON SFR. If SMOD = 0, the baud rate is 1/32 of the  
core clock. If SMOD = 1, the baud rate is 1/16 of the core clock:  
2SMOD  
Mode 2 Baud Rate =  
× Core Clock Frequency  
32  
Timer 2 is selected as the baud rate generator by setting the  
TCLK and/or RCLK in T2CON. The baud rates for transmit  
and receive can be simultaneously different. Setting RCLK  
and/or TCLK puts Timer 2 into its baud rate generator mode as  
shown in Figure 60.  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate Generation  
The baud rates in Modes 1 and 3 are determined by the overflow  
rate in Timer 1 or Timer 2, or in both (one for transmit and the  
other for receive).  
In this case, the baud rate is given by the formula  
Timer 1 Generated Baud Rates  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate =  
When Timer 1 is used as the baud rate generator, the baud rates  
in Modes 1 and 3 are determined by the Timer 1 overflow rate  
and the value of SMOD as follows:  
Core Clock Frequency  
(
16×  
[
65536 −  
(
RCAP2H : RCAP2L  
)])  
2SMOD  
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate =  
× Timer 1 Overflow Rate  
32  
TIMER 1  
OVERFLOW  
2
0
1
SMOD  
CONTROL  
C/T2 = 0  
CORE  
CLK*  
TIMER 2  
OVERFLOW  
1
1
0
0
TL2  
(8 BITS)  
TH2  
(8 BITS)  
RCLK  
16  
C/T2 = 1  
T2  
PIN  
RX  
CLOCK  
TR2  
TCLK  
16  
NOTE: AVAILABILITY OF ADDITIONAL  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT  
RELOAD  
TX  
CLOCK  
RCAP2H  
RCAP2L  
TIMER 2  
INTERRUPT  
T2EX  
PIN  
EXF 2  
CONTROL  
TRANSITION  
DETECTOR  
EXEN2  
*THE CORE CLOCK IS THE OUTPUT OF THE PLL (SEE THE ON-CHIP PLL SECTION)  
Figure 60. Timer 2, UART Baud Rates  
Rev. A | Page 82 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Timer 3 Generated Baud Rates  
The appropriate value to write to the DIV2-1-0 bits can be  
calculated using the following formula where fCORE is defined in  
PLLCON SFR. Note that the DIV value must be rounded down.  
The high integer dividers in a UART block mean that high  
speed baud rates are not always possible. Also, generating baud  
rates requires the exclusive use of a timer, rendering it unusable  
for other applications when the UART is required. To address  
this problem, the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 have a  
dedicated baud rate timer (Timer 3) specifically for generating  
highly accurate baud rates. Timer 3 can be used instead of  
Timer 1 or Timer 2 for generating very accurate high speed  
UART baud rates including 115200 and 230400. Timer 3 also  
allows a much wider range of baud rates to be obtained. In fact,  
every desired bit rate from 12 bps to 393216 bps can be  
generated to within an error of 0.8%. Timer 3 also frees up the  
other three timers, allowing them to be used for different  
applications. A block diagram of Timer 3 is shown in Figure 61.  
Core Clock Frequency  
16× Baud Rate  
log (2)  
log  
DIV =  
T3FD is the fractional divider ratio required to achieve the  
required baud rate. The appropriate value for T3FD can be  
calculated with the following formula:  
2×Core Clock Frequency  
T3FD =  
64  
2
DIV 1 × Baud Rate  
Note that T3FD should be rounded to the nearest integer. Once  
the values for DIV and T3FD are calculated, the actual baud  
rate can be calculated with the following formula:  
CORE  
CLK  
TIMER 1/TIMER 2  
2×Core Clock Frequency  
Actual Baud Rate =  
Tx CLOCK  
FRACTIONAL  
DIVIDER  
÷ (1 + T3FD/64)  
2
DIV 1 ×(T3FD + 64)  
TIMER 1/TIMER 2  
Rx CLOCK  
1
0
For example, to get a baud rate of 9600 while operating at a core  
clock frequency of 1.5725 MHz, that is, CD = 3,  
÷
2DIV  
Rx CLOCK  
Tx CLOCK  
1
0
DIV = log(1572500/(16 × 9600))/log2 = 3.35 = 3  
÷
16  
T3EN  
T3 Rx/Tx  
CLOCK  
Note that the DIV result is rounded down.  
T3FD = (2 × 1572500)/(23−1 × 9600) − 64 = 18 = 12H  
Figure 61. Timer 3, UART Baud Rate  
Two SFRs (T3CON and T3FD) are used to control Timer 3.  
T3CON is the baud rate control SFR, allowing Timer 3 to be  
used to set up the UART baud rate, and to set up the binary  
divider (DIV).  
Therefore, the actual baud rate is 9588 bps, which gives an error  
of 0.12%.  
The T3CON and T3FD registers are used to control Timer 3.  
T3CON – Timer 3 Control Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
9EH  
00H  
No  
Table 55. T3CON SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
T3BAUDEN  
T3UARTBAUD Enable.  
Set to enable Timer 3 to generate the baud rate. When set, PCON.7, T2CON.4, and T2CON.5 are  
ignored. Cleared to let the baud rate be generated as per a standard 8052.  
6
5
4
3
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Binary Divider  
2, 1, 0  
DIV2, DIV1, DIV0  
DIV2 DIV1  
DIV0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Binary Divider 0. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 1. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 2. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 3. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 4. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 5. See Table 57.  
Binary Divider 6. See Table 57.  
Rev. A | Page 83 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
T3FD—Timer 3 Fractional Divider Register  
See Table 57 for values.  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
9DH  
00H  
No  
Table 56. T3FD SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
----  
----  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 5.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 4.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 3.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 2.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 1.  
Timer 3 Fractional Divider Bit 0.  
T3FD.5  
T3FD.4  
T3FD.3  
T3FD.2  
T3FD.1  
T3FD.0  
Table 57. Common Baud Rates Using Timer 3 with a 12.58 MHz PLL Clock  
Ideal Baud  
CD  
DIV  
T3CON  
T3FD  
% Error  
230400  
0
1
81H  
2DH  
0.18  
115200  
115200  
0
1
2
1
82H  
81H  
2DH  
2DH  
0.18  
0.18  
57600  
57600  
57600  
0
1
2
3
2
1
83H  
82H  
81H  
2DH  
2DH  
2DH  
0.18  
0.18  
0.18  
38400  
38400  
38400  
38400  
0
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
84H  
83H  
82H  
81H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
19200  
19200  
19200  
19200  
19200  
0
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
85H  
84H  
83H  
82H  
81H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
4
3
2
1
86H  
85H  
84H  
83H  
82H  
81H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
12H  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
0.12  
Rev. A | Page 84 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
INTERRUPT SYSTEM  
The ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 provide nine interrupt sources with two priority levels. The control and configuration of the  
interrupt system is carried out through three interrupt-related SFRs:  
IE  
Interrupt Enable Register  
IP  
IEIP2  
Interrupt Priority Register  
Secondary Interrupt Enable Register  
IE—Interrupt Enable Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
A8H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 58. IE SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
EA  
Set by the user to enable all interrupt sources.  
Cleared by the user to disable all interrupt sources.  
Set by the user to enable the ADC interrupt.  
6
5
4
3
2
EADC  
ET2  
ES  
Cleared by the user to disable the ADC interrupt.  
Set by the user to enable the Timer 2 interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the Timer 2 interrupt.  
Set by the user to enable the UART serial port interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the UART serial port interrupt.  
Set by the user to enable the Timer 1 interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the Timer 1 interrupt.  
Set by the user to enable External Interrupt 1 (INT0).  
Cleared by the user to disable External Interrupt 1 (INT0).  
Set by the user to enable the Timer 0 interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the Timer 0 interrupt.  
Set by the user to enable External Interrupt 0 (INT0).  
Cleared by the user to disable External Interrupt 0 (INT0).  
ET1  
EX1  
1
0
ET0  
EX0  
IP—Interrupt Priority Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
B8H  
00H  
Yes  
Table 59. IP SFR Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-----  
PADC  
PT2  
PS  
PT1  
PX1  
PT0  
PX0  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
ADC Interrupt Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
Timer 2 Interrupt Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
UART Serial Port Interrupt Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
Timer 1 Interrupt Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
INT0 (External Interrupt 1) priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
Timer 0 Interrupt Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
INT0 (External Interrupt 0) Priority (1 = High; 0 = Low).  
Rev. A | Page 85 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
IEIP2—Secondary Interrupt Enable Register  
SFR Address:  
Power-On Default:  
Bit Addressable:  
A9H  
A0H  
No  
Table 60. IEIP2 Bit Designations  
Bit No.  
Name Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
----  
PTI  
PPSM  
PSI  
----  
Not Implemented. Write Don’t Care.  
Time Interval Counter Interrupt Priority Setting (1 = High, 0 = Low).  
Power Supply Monitor Interrupt Priority Setting (1 = High, 0 = Low).  
SPI/I2C Interrupt Priority Setting (1 = High, 0 = Low).  
This bit must contain 0.  
Set by the user to enable the time interval counter interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the time interval counter interrupt.  
ETI  
1
0
EPSMI Set by the user to enable the power supply monitor interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the power supply monitor interrupt.  
ESI  
Set by the user to enable the SPI/I2C serial port interrupt.  
Cleared by the user to disable the SPI/I2C serial port interrupt.  
INTERRUPT PRIORITY  
INTERRUPT VECTORS  
The interrupt enable registers are written by the user to enable  
individual interrupt sources; the interrupt priority registers  
allow the user to select one of two priority levels for each  
interrupt. A high priority interrupt can interrupt the service  
routine of a low priority interrupt, and if two interrupts of  
different priorities occur at the same time, the higher level  
interrupt is serviced first. An interrupt cannot be interrupted by  
another interrupt of the same priority level. If two interrupts of  
the same priority level occur simultaneously, the polling sequence,  
as shown in Table 61, is observed.  
When an interrupt occurs, the program counter is pushed onto  
the stack, and the corresponding interrupt vector address is  
loaded into the program counter. The interrupt vector addresses  
are shown in Table 62.  
Table 62. Interrupt Vector Addresses  
Source  
Vector Address  
IE0  
0003H  
TF0  
000BH  
IE1  
0013H  
TF1  
001BH  
Table 61. Priority within Interrupt Level  
RI + TI  
0023H  
Source  
Priority  
Description  
TF2 + EXF2  
002BH  
PSMI  
WDS  
IE0  
RDY0/RDY1  
TF0  
1 (Highest)  
2
2
3
4
5
Power Supply Monitor Interrupt  
Watchdog Timer Interrupt  
External Interrupt 0  
ADC Interrupt  
Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt  
External Interrupt 1  
RDY0/RDY1 (ADuC845 only)  
0033H  
003BH  
0043H  
0053H  
ISPI/I2CI  
PSMI  
TII  
WDS  
005BH  
IE1  
TF1  
ISPI/I2CI  
RI/TI  
TF2/EXF2  
TII  
6
7
8
9
Timer/Counter 1 Interrupt  
SPI/I2C Interrupt  
UART Serial Port Interrupt  
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt  
Timer Interval Counter Interrupt  
11 (Lowest)  
Rev. A | Page 86 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
HARDWARE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS  
This section outlines some of the key hardware design  
considerations that must be addressed when integrating the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 into any hardware system.  
In either implementation, Port 0 (P0) serves as a multiplexed  
address/data bus. It emits the low byte of the data pointer (DPL)  
as an address, which is latched by ALE prior to data being placed  
on the bus by the parts (write operation) or the external data  
memory (read operation). Port 2 (P2) provides the data pointer  
page byte (DPP) to be latched by ALE, followed by the data  
pointer high byte (DPH). If no latch is connected to P2, DPP is  
ignored by the SRAM, and the 8051 standard of 64-kbyte external  
data memory access is maintained.  
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE  
In addition to their internal program and data memories, the  
parts can access up to 16 Mbytes of external data memory  
(SRAM). No external program memory access is available.  
To begin executing code, tie the  
(external access) pin high.  
EA  
The following example shows the code used to write data to  
external data memory.  
When  
is high (pulled up to VDD—see Figure 69), user  
EA  
program execution starts at Address 0 in the internal 62-kbyte  
Flash/EE code space. When executing from internal code space,  
accesses to the program space above F7FFH (62 kbytes) are read  
as NOP instructions.  
MOV DPP, #10h ;Set addr to 100000h  
MOV DPH, #00h  
MOV DPL, #00h  
MOV A,  
#'B' ;Write Char ‘B’ (42h)  
Note that a second very important function of the  
described in the Single-Pin Emulation Mode section under the  
Other Hardware Considerations section.  
pin is  
EA  
MOVX @DPTR,A ;Move to DPP:DPH:DPL addr  
POWER SUPPLIES  
Figure 62 shows a hardware configuration for accessing up to  
64 kbytes of external data memory. This interface is standard to  
any 8051 compatible MCU.  
The parts’ operational power supply voltage range is 2.7 V to  
5.25 V. Although the guaranteed data sheet specifications are  
given only for power supplies within 2.7 V to 3.6 V and 4.75 V  
to 5.25 V ( 5% of the nominal 5 V level), the chip functions  
equally well at any power supply level between 2.7 V and 5.25 V.  
SRAM  
ADuC845/  
ADuC847/  
ADuC848  
D0–D7  
(DATA)  
P0  
Separate analog and digital power supply pins (AVDD and DVDD  
respectively) allow AVDD to be kept relatively free of the noisy  
digital signals often present on a system DVDD line. In this mode,  
,
LATCH  
A0–A7  
ALE  
the part can also operate with split supplies, that is, using different  
voltage supply levels for each supply. For example, the system  
can be designed to operate with a DVDD voltage level of 3 V and  
the AVDD level can be at 5 V, or vice versa, if required. A typical  
split-supply configuration is shown in Figure 64.  
A8–A15  
P2  
RD  
OE  
WR  
WE  
Figure 62. External Data Memory Interface (64-kbyte Address Space)  
DIGITAL SUPPLY  
ANALOG SUPPLY  
10µF  
If access to more than 64 kbytes of RAM is desired, a feature  
unique to the MicroConverter allows addressing up to 16 Mbytes  
of external RAM simply by adding another latch as shown in  
Figure 63.  
10µF  
+
+
22  
36  
51  
AV  
4
DD  
DV  
DD  
0.1µF  
ADuC845/  
ADuC847/  
ADuC848  
0.1µF  
SRAM  
ADuC845/  
23  
37  
38  
50  
5
6
ADuC847/  
ADuC848  
D0–D7  
(DATA)  
DGND  
P0  
AGND  
LATCH  
A0–A7  
ALE  
Figure 64. External Dual-Supply Connections  
(56-Lead CSP Pin Numbering)  
A8–A15  
P2  
LATCH  
A16–A23  
RD  
OE  
WR  
WE  
Figure 63. External Data Memory Interface (16-Mbtye Address Space)  
Rev. A | Page 87 of 108  
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
POWER CONSUMPTION  
As an alternative to providing two separate power supplies,  
AVDD can be kept quiet by placing a small series resistor and/or  
ferrite bead between it and DVDD, and then decoupling AVDD  
separately to ground. An example of this configuration is shown  
in Figure 65. In this configuration, other analog circuitry (such  
as op amps and voltage reference) can be powered from the  
AVDD supply line as well.  
The DVDD power supply current consumption is specified in  
normal and power-down modes. The AVDD power supply  
current is specified with the analog peripherals disabled. The  
normal mode power consumption represents the current drawn  
from DVDD by the digital core. The other on-chip peripherals  
(such as the watchdog timer and power supply monitor)  
consume negligible current and are therefore included with the  
normal operating current. The user must add any currents  
sourced by the parallel and serial I/O pins, and those sourced by  
the DAC to determine the total current needed at the ADuC845/  
ADuC847/ADuC848 DVDD and AVDD supply pins. Also, current  
drawn from the DVDD supply increases by approximately 5 mA  
during Flash/EE erase and program cycles.  
DIGITAL SUPPLY  
1.6  
10µF  
BEAD  
10µF  
+
22  
36  
51  
AV  
4
DD  
DV  
DD  
0.1µF  
ADuC845/  
ADuC847/  
ADuC848  
0.1µF  
23  
37  
38  
50  
5
6
DGND  
POWER-SAVING MODES  
AGND  
Setting the power-down mode bit, PCON.1, in the PCON SFR  
described in Table 6, allows the chip to be switched from  
normal mode into full power-down mode.  
Figure 65. External Single-Supply Connections (56-Lead CSP Pin Numbering)  
Notice that in both Figure 64 and Figure 65 a large value (10 µF)  
reservoir capacitor sits on DVDD and a separate 10 µF capacitor  
sits on AVDD. Also, local decoupling capacitors (0.1 µF) are  
located at each VDD pin of the chip. As per standard design  
practice, be sure to include all of these capacitors and ensure  
that the smaller capacitors are closer than the 10 µF capacitors  
to each VDD pin with lead lengths as short as possible. Connect  
the ground terminal of each of these capacitors directly to the  
underlying ground plane. Finally, note that, at all times, the  
analog and digital ground pins on the part must be referenced  
to the same system ground reference point. It is recommended  
that the CSP paddle be soldered to ensure mechanical stability  
but be floated with respect to system VDDs or grounds.  
In power-down mode, both the PLL and the clock to the core  
are stopped. The on-chip oscillator can be halted or can  
continue to oscillate, depending on the state of the oscillator  
power-down bit (OSC_PD) in the PLLCON SFR. The TIC,  
driven directly from the oscillator, can also be enabled during  
power-down. However, all other on-chip peripherals are shut  
down. Port pins retain their logic levels in this mode, but the  
DAC output goes to a high impedance state (three-state) while  
ALE and  
outputs are held low. There are five ways to  
PSEN  
terminate power-down mode:  
Asserting the RESET Pin  
Returns to normal mode. All registers are set to their reset  
default value and program execution starts at the reset  
vector once the RESET pin is de-asserted.  
POWER-ON RESET OPERATION  
An internal power-on reset (POR) is implemented on the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848. For DVDD below 2.63 V, the  
internal POR holds the part in reset. As DVDD rises above 2.63 V,  
an internal timer times out for typically 128 ms before the part  
is released from reset. The user must ensure that the power  
supply has at least reached a stable 2.7 V minimum level by this  
time. Likewise on power-down, the internal POR holds the part  
in reset until the power supply drops below 1 V. Figure 66  
illustrates the operation of the internal POR.  
Cycling Power  
All registers are set to their default state and program exe-  
cution starts at the reset vector approximately 128 ms later.  
Time Interval Counter (TIC) Interrupt  
If the OSC_PD bit in the PLLCON SFR is clear, the 32 kHz  
oscillator remains powered up even in power-down mode.  
If the time interval counter (wake-up/RTC timer) is  
enabled, a TIC interrupt wakes the part from power-down  
mode. The CPU services the TIC interrupt. The RETI at  
the end of the TIC ISR returns the core to the next  
instruction after that one that enabled power-down.  
2.63V TYP  
DV  
DD  
128ms TYP  
128ms TYP  
1.0V TYP  
1.0V TYP  
INTERNAL  
CORE RESET  
Figure 66. ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 Internal Power-On Reset Operation  
Rev. A | Page 88 of 108  
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
In these cases, tie the AGND and DGND pins of the part to the  
analog ground plane, as shown in Figure 67b. In systems with  
only one ground plane, ensure that the digital and analog  
components are physically separated onto separate halves of the  
board such that digital return currents do not flow near analog  
circuitry and vice versa. The parts can then be placed between  
the digital and analog sections, as shown in Figure 67c.  
SPI Interrupt  
If the SERIPD bit in the PCON SFR is set, an SPI interrupt,  
if enabled, wakes up the part from power-down mode. The  
CPU services the SPI interrupt. The RETI at the end of the  
ISR returns the core to the next instruction after the one  
that enabled power-down.  
Interrupt  
INT0  
In all of these scenarios, and in more complicated real-life  
applications, keep in mind the flow of current from the supplies  
and back to ground. Make sure that the return paths for all  
currents are as close as possible to the paths the currents took to  
reach their destinations. For example, do not power components  
on the analog side of Figure 67b with DVDD since that would  
force return currents from DVDD to flow through AGND. Also,  
try to avoid digital currents flowing under analog circuitry,  
which could happen if the user placed a noisy digital chip on  
the left half of the board in Figure 67c. Whenever possible,  
avoid large discontinuities in the ground plane(s) (such as are  
formed by a long trace on the same layer), since they force  
return signals to travel a longer path. Make all connections  
directly to the ground plane, with little or no trace separating  
the pin from its via to ground.  
If the INT0PD bit in the PCON SFR is set, an external  
interrupt 0, if enabled, wakes up the part from power-  
down. The CPU services the interrupt. The RETI at the end  
of the ISR returns the core to the next instruction after the  
one that enabled power-down.  
Wake-Up from Power-Down Latency  
Even with the 32 kHz crystal enabled during power-down, the  
PLL takes some time to lock after a wake-up from power-down.  
Typically, the PLL takes about 1 ms to lock. During this time,  
code executes, but not at the specified frequency. Some opera-  
tions, for example, UART communications, require an accurate  
clock to achieve the specified 50 Hz/60 Hz rejection from the  
ADCs. Therefore, it is advisable to wait until the PLL has locked  
before proceeding with normal code execution. The following  
code can be used to wait for the PLL to lock:  
WAITFORLOCK: MOV A, PLLCON  
JNB ACC.6, WAITFORLOCK  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
a.  
b.  
c.  
If the crystal is powered down during power-down, an additional  
delay is associated with the startup of the crystal oscillator  
before the PLL can lock. Typically taking about 150 ms, 32 kHz  
crystals are inherently slow to oscillate. During this time before  
lock, code executes, but the exact frequency of the clock cannot  
be guaranteed. For any timing-sensitive operations, it is  
recommended to wait for lock by using the lock bit in PLLCON  
as shown previously.  
AGND  
DGND  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
An alternative way of saving power in power-down mode  
is to slow down the core clock by using the CD bits in the  
PLLCON register.  
AGND  
DGND  
GROUNDING AND BOARD LAYOUT  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
As with all high resolution data converters, special attention  
must be paid to grounding and PC board layout of ADuC845/  
ADuC847/ADuC848-based designs in order to achieve  
optimum performance from the ADCs and DAC.  
GND  
Figure 67. System Grounding Schemes  
Although the parts have separate pins for analog and digital  
ground (AGND and DGND), the user must not tie these to  
separate ground planes unless the two ground planes are  
connected together very close to the part as shown in the  
simplified example in Figure 67a. In systems where digital and  
analog ground planes are connected together somewhere else  
(at the system’s power supply, for example), they cannot be  
connected again near the part since a ground loop would result.  
If the user plans to connect fast logic signals (rise/fall time < 5 ns)  
to any of the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848s digital inputs,  
add a series resistor to each relevant line to keep rise and fall  
times longer than 5 ns at the parts input pins. A value of 100 Ω  
or 200 Ω is usually sufficient to prevent high speed signals from  
coupling capacitively into the part and affecting the accuracy of  
ADC conversions.  
Rev. A | Page 89 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
When using the LFCSP package, it is recommended that the  
paddle underneath the chip be soldered to the board to provide  
maximum mechanical stability. However, it is recommended  
that this paddle not be grounded but left floating. All results and  
specifications contained in this data sheet are taken or recorded  
with the paddle floating.  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
32  
33  
12pF  
32.768kHz  
TO INTERNAL PLL  
12pF  
System Self-Identification  
Figure 68. Crystal Connectivity to ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
In some hardware designs, it may be an advantage for the  
software to be able to identify the host MicroConverter.  
As shown in the typical external crystal connection diagram in  
Figure 68, two internal 12 pF capacitors are provided on-chip.  
These are connected internally, directly to the XTAL1 and XTAL2  
pins. The total input capacitance at both pins is detailed in the  
Specifications table. Note that the total capacitance required for  
a particular crystal must be in accordance with the crystal  
manufacturer. However, in most cases, no additional external  
capacitance is required above that already supplied on-chip.  
The CHIPID SFR is a read-only register located at SFR address  
C2H. The upper nibble of this SFR designates the MicroConverter  
within the Σ-∆ ADC family. User software can read this SFR to  
identify the host MicroConverter and therefore execute slightly  
different code if required. The CHIPID SFR reads as follows for  
the Σ-∆ ADC family of MicroConverter products. Note that the  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 are treated as one part as far as  
the CHIPID is concerned.  
OTHER HARDWARE CONSIDERATIONS  
In-Circuit Serial Download Access  
Table 63. CHIPID Values for Σ-∆ MicroConverter Products  
Nearly all ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 designs can take  
advantage of the in-circuit reprogrammability of the chip. This  
is accomplished by a connection to the parts” UART, which  
requires an external RS-232 chip for level translation if down-  
loading code from a PC. Basic configuration of an RS-232  
connection is shown in Figure 69 with a simple ADM3202-  
based circuit. If users would rather not include an RS-232 chip  
on the target board, refer to Application Note uC006,  
“A 4-Wire UART-to-PC Interface” available at  
Part  
CHIPID  
ADuC816  
ADuC824  
ADuC836  
ADuC834  
1xH  
0xH  
3xH  
2xH  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
AxH  
Clock Oscillator  
As described earlier, the core clock frequency for the ADuC845/  
ADuC847/ADuC848 is generated from an on-chip PLL that  
locks onto a multiple (384 times) of 32.768 kHz. The latter is  
generated from an internal clock oscillator. To use the internal  
clock oscillator, connect a 32.768 kHz parallel resonant crystal  
between XTAL1 and XTAL2 as shown in Figure 68.  
www.analog.com/microconverter, for a simple (and zero-cost-  
per-board) method of gaining in-circuit serial download access  
to the part.  
Rev. A | Page 90 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DOWNLOAD/DEBUG  
ENABLE JUMPER  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
1k  
DV  
DD  
1kΩ  
2-PIN HEADER FOR  
EMULATION ACCESS  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
44 43  
11 P1.6/I  
EXC  
1/AIN7  
200mA/400mA  
EXCITATION  
CURRENT  
AV  
DD  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
CSP PACKAGE  
AV  
4
5
DD  
0.1µF  
AGND  
AGND  
XTAL2 35  
XTAL1  
6
RTD  
34  
REFIN–  
REFIN+  
P1.0/AIN1  
P1.1/AIN2  
7
32.768kHz  
8
R
REF  
5.6kV  
56  
1
DV  
17 18 19 22 36 51 23 37 38 50  
DD  
RESET ACTIVE HIGH.  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
0.1µF  
DV  
DD  
DV  
DD  
RS232 INTERFACE*  
STANDARD D-TYPE  
SERIAL COMMS  
CONNECTOR TO  
PC HOST  
ADM3202  
C1+  
V
CC  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
V+  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C1–  
C2+  
C2–  
V–  
T1OUT  
R1IN  
R1OUT  
T1IN  
T2OUT  
R2IN  
T2IN  
R2OUT  
*EXTERNAL UART TRANSCEIVER INTEGRATED IN SYSTEM OR AS PART  
OF AN EXTERNAL DONGLE AS DESCRIBED IN APPLICATION NOTE uC006.  
Figure 69. UART Connectivity in Typical System  
download mode and fail to begin user code execution. To  
prevent this, ensure that no external signals are capable of  
In addition to the basic UART connections, users also need a  
way to trigger the chip into download mode. This is accomplished  
via a 1 kΩ pull-down resistor that can be jumpered onto the  
pulling the  
pin low, except for the external  
jumper  
PSEN  
PSEN  
itself or the method of download entry in use during a reset or  
power-cycle condition.  
pin, as shown in Figure 69. To get the parts into download  
PSEN  
mode, connect this jumper and power-cycle the device (or  
manually reset the device, if a manual reset button is available),  
and it is ready to receive a new program serially. With the  
jumper removed, the device powers on in normal mode (and  
runs the program) whenever power is cycled or RESET is  
Embedded Serial Port Debugger  
From a hardware perspective, entry to serial port debug mode is  
identical to the serial download entry sequence described  
previously. In fact, both serial download and serial port debug  
modes are essentially one mode of operation used in two  
different ways.  
toggled. Note that  
is normally an output and that it is  
PSEN  
sampled as an input only on the falling edge of RESET, that is, at  
power-on or upon an external manual reset. Note also that if  
Note that the serial port debugger is fully contained on the  
device, unlike ROM monitor type debuggers, and, therefore, no  
external memory is needed to enable in-system debug sessions.  
any external circuitry unintentionally pulls  
low during  
PSEN  
power-on or reset events, it could cause the chip to enter  
Rev. A | Page 91 of 108  
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Single-Pin Emulation Mode  
Here, the on-chip excitation current sources are enabled to  
excite the sensor. The excitation current flows directly through  
the RTD generating a voltage across the RTD proportional to its  
resistance. This differential voltage is routed directly to one set  
of the positive and negative inputs of the ADC (AIN1, AIN2,  
respectively in this case). The same current that excited the  
RTD also flows through a series resistance, RREF, generating a  
ratiometric voltage reference, VREF. The ratiometric voltage  
reference ensures that variations in the excitation current do not  
affect the measurement system since the input voltage from the  
RTD and reference voltage across RREF vary ratiometrically with  
the excitation current. Resistor RREF must, however, have a low  
temperature coefficient to avoid errors in the reference voltage  
overtemperature. RREF must also be large enough to generate at  
least a 1 V voltage reference.  
Built into the ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 is a dedicated  
controller for single-pin in-circuit emulation (ICE). In this mode,  
emulation access is gained by connection to a single pin, the  
pin. Normally on the 8051 standard, this pin is hardwired either  
high or low to select execution from internal or external program  
memory space. Note that external program memory or execu-  
tion from external program memory is not allowed on the  
devices. To enable single-pin emulation mode, users need to pull  
EA  
the  
pin high through a 1 kΩ resistor as shown in Figure 69.  
EA  
The emulator then connects to the 2-pin header also shown in  
Figure 69. To be compatible with the standard connector that  
comes with the single-pin emulator available from Accutron  
Limited (www.accutron.com), use a 2-pin 0.1-inch pitch  
Friction Lock header from Molex (www.molex.com) such as  
part number 22-27-2021. Be sure to observe the polarity of this  
header. As shown in Figure 69, when the Friction Lock tab is at  
the right, the ground pin should be the lower of the two pins  
when viewed from the top.  
The preceding example shows just a single differential ADC  
connection using a single reference input pair. The ADuC845/  
ADuC847/ADuC848 have the capability of connecting to five  
differential inputs directly or ten single-ended inputs (LFCSP  
package only) as well as having a second reference input. This  
arrangement means that different sensors with different  
reference ranges can be connected to the part with the need for  
external multiplexing circuitry. This arrangement is shown in  
Figure 70. The bridge sensor shown can be a load cell or a  
pressure sensor. The RTD is shown using a reference voltage  
derived from the RREF resistor via the REFIN inputs, and the  
bridge sensor is shown using a divided down AVDD reference via  
the REFIN2 inputs.  
Typical System Configuration  
A typical ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 configuration is  
shown in Figure 69. Figure 69 also includes connections for a  
typical analog measurement application of the parts, namely an  
interface to an resistive temperature device (RTD). The  
arrangement shown is commonly referred to as a 4-wire RTD  
configuration.  
Rev. A | Page 92 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
DOWNLOAD/DEBUG  
ENABLE JUMPER  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
1kΩ  
DV  
DD  
1kΩ  
2-PIN HEADER FOR  
EMULATION ACCESS  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
44 43  
11 P1.6/I  
EXC  
1/AIN7  
200mA/400mA  
EXCITATION  
CURRENT  
AV  
DD  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
CSP PACKAGE  
AV  
4
5
DGND  
DV  
DD  
0.1µF  
AGND  
DD  
XTAL2 35  
XTAL1  
AGND  
6
7
RTD  
34  
REFIN–  
8
REFIN+  
R
REF  
5.6kV  
56  
1
P1.0/AIN1  
P1.1/AIN2  
P1.2/AIN3/REFIN2+  
AIN9  
AV  
DD  
R
2
15  
16  
3
R
AIN10  
P1.3/AIN4/REFIN2–  
DV  
17 18 19 22 36 51 23 37 38 50  
DD  
RESET ACTIVE HIGH.  
(NORMALLY OPEN)  
0.1µF  
DV  
DD  
DV  
DD  
RS232  
CONNECTION  
Figure 70. Dual Reference Typical Connectivity  
Rev. A | Page 93 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
QuickStart DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM  
The QuickStart Development System is an entry-level, low cost  
development tool suite supporting the ADuC8xx MicroConverter  
product family. The system consists of the following PC-based  
(Windows® compatible) hardware and software development  
tools:  
QuickStart-PLUS DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM  
The QuickStart-PLUS development system offers users  
enhanced nonintrusive debug and emulation tools. The system  
consists of the following PC-based (Windows compatible)  
hardware and software development tools:  
Hardware:  
Evaluation board and serial port  
programming cable.  
Serial download software.  
Hardware:  
Software:  
Prototype Board, Accutron NonIntrusive  
Single-Pin Emulator.  
ASPIRE Integrated Development  
Environment. Features full C and Assembly  
emulation using the Accutron single-pin  
emulator.  
Software:  
Miscellaneous: CD-ROM documentation and prototype  
evaluation board.  
A brief description of some of the software tools and  
components in the QuickStart system follows.  
Miscellaneous: CD-ROM documentation.  
Download—In-Circuit Serial Downloader  
The serial downloader is a Windows application that allows the  
user to serially download an assembled program (Intel® hexa-  
decimal format file) to the on-chip program flash memory via  
the serial COM port on a standard PC. Application Note uC004  
details this serial download protocol and is available from  
www.analog.com/microconverter.  
ASPIRE—IDE  
The ASPIRE® integrated development environment is a  
Windows application that allows the user to compile, edit, and  
debug code in the same environment. The ASPIRE software  
allows users to debug code execution on silicon using the  
MicroConverter UART serial port. The debugger provides  
access to all on-chip peripherals during a typical debug session  
as well as single-step, animate (automatic single stepping), and  
break-point code execution control.  
Note that the ASPIRE IDE is also included as part of the  
QuickStart-PLUS system. As part of the QuickStart-PLUS  
system the ASPIRE IDE also supports mixed level and C source  
debugging. This is not available in the QuickStart system where  
the program is limited to assembly only.  
Rev. A | Page 94 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS  
AC inputs during testing are driven at DVDD – 0.5 V for Logic 1 and 0.45 V for Logic 0. Timing measurements are made at VIH min for  
Logic 1 and VIL max for Logic 0 as shown in Figure 71.  
For timing purposes, a port pin is no longer floating when a 100 mV change from load voltage occurs. A port pin begins to float when a  
100 mV change from the loaded VOH/VOL level occurs as shown in Figure 71.  
CLOAD for all outputs = 80 pF, unless otherwise noted.  
AVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V or 4.75 V to 5.25 V, DVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V or 4.75 V to 5.25 V; all specifications TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 64. CLOCK INPUT (External Clock Driven XTAL1) Parameter  
32.768 kHz External Crystal  
Min  
Typ  
30.52  
6.26  
6.26  
9
Max  
Unit  
µs  
µs  
µs  
ns  
tCK  
XTAL1 Period  
tCKL  
tCKH  
tCKR  
XTAL1 Width Low  
XTAL1 Width High  
XTAL1 Rise Time  
XTAL1 Fall Time  
tCKF  
9
ns  
MHz  
µs  
1/tCORE  
tCORE  
tCYC  
Core Clock Frequency1  
Core Clock Period2  
Machine Cycle Time3  
0.098  
10.2  
1.57  
0.636  
0.636  
12.58  
0.08  
µs  
1 ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 internal PLL locks onto a multiple (512 times) of the 32.768 kHz external crystal frequency to provide a stable 12.58 MHz internal clock  
for the system. The core can operate at this frequency or at a binary submultiple called Core_Clk, selected via the PLLCON SFR.  
2 This number is measured at the default Core_Clk operating frequency of 1.57 MHz.  
3 ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848 machine cycle time is nominally defined as 1/Core_Clk.  
DV – 0.5V  
DD  
V
– 0.1V  
+ 0.1V  
V
– 0.1V  
LOAD  
LOAD  
0.2DV + 0.9V  
DD  
TIMING  
REFERENCE  
POINTS  
V
V
LOAD  
TEST POINTS  
LOAD  
0.2DV – 0.1V  
DD  
V
V
– 0.1V  
LOAD  
LOAD  
0.45V  
Figure 71. Timing Waveform Characteristics  
Rev. A | Page 95 of 108  
 
 
 
 
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 65. EXTERNAL DATA MEMORY READ CYCLE Parameter  
12.58 MHz Core Clock  
6.29 MHz Core Clock  
Max  
Min  
60  
Max  
Min  
125  
120  
290  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tRLRH  
tAVLL  
tLLAX  
tRLDV  
tRHDX  
tRHDZ  
tLLDV  
tAVDV  
tLLWL  
tAVWL  
tRLAZ  
tWHLH  
RD Pulse Width  
Address Valid after ALE Low  
Address Hold after ALE Low  
RD Low to Valid Data In  
Data and Address Hold after RD  
Data Float after RD  
60  
145  
48  
100  
0
0
150  
170  
230  
625  
350  
470  
ALE Low to Valid Data In  
Address to Valid Data In  
ALE Low to RD or WR Low  
Address Valid to RD or WR Low  
RD Low to Address Float  
RD or WR High to ALE High  
130  
190  
255  
375  
15  
35  
60  
120  
ALE (O)  
tWHLH  
PSEN (O)  
tLLDV  
tLLWL  
tRLRH  
RD (O)  
tAVWL  
tLLAX  
tRLDV  
tRHDZ  
tRHDX  
tAVLL  
tRLAZ  
A0ٛ  
A7 (OUT)  
tAVDV  
DATA (IN)  
PORT 0 (I/O)  
A16  
ٛ
A23  
A8 A15  
PORT 2 (O)  
Figure 72. External Data Memory Read Cycle  
Rev. A | Page 96 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 66. EXTERNAL DATA MEMORY WRITE CYCLE Parameter  
12.58 MHz Core Clock  
6.29 MHz Core Clock  
Min  
65  
Max  
Min  
130  
120  
135  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
tWLWH  
tAVLL  
tLLAX  
WR Pulse Width  
Address Valid after ALE Low  
Address Hold after ALE Low  
ALE Low to RD or WR Low  
Address Valid to RD or WR Low  
Data Valid to WR Transition  
Data Setup before WR  
60  
65  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tLLWL  
130  
260  
tAVWL  
tQVWX  
tQVWH  
tWHQX  
tWHLH  
190  
60  
375  
120  
250  
755  
125  
ns  
ns  
120  
380  
60  
ns  
Data and Address Hold after WR  
RD or WR High to ALE High  
ns  
ns  
ALE (O)  
tWHLH  
PSEN (O)  
tLLWL  
tWLWH  
WR (O)  
tAVWL  
tLLAX  
tQVWX  
tWHQX  
tAVLL  
tQVWH  
DATA  
A0ٛA7  
A16ٛ  
A23  
V8 A15  
PORT 2 (O)  
Figure 73. External Data Memory Write Cycle  
Rev. A | Page 97 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 67. I2C COMPATIBLE INTERFACE TIMING Parameter  
Parameter  
Min  
1.3  
0.6  
0.6  
100  
Max  
Unit  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tL  
tH  
SCLOCK Low Pulse Width  
SCLOCK High Pulse Width  
Start Condition Hold Time  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
Setup Time for Repeated Start  
Stop Condition Setup Time  
Bus Free Time between a Stop Condition and a Start Condition  
Rise Time of Both SCLOCK and SDATA  
Fall Time of Both SCLOCK and SDATA  
Pulse Width of Spike Suppressed  
tSHD  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tRSU  
tPSU  
tBUF  
tR  
0.9  
0.6  
0.6  
1.3  
300  
300  
50  
tF  
1
tSUP  
____________________________________________  
1 Input filtering on both the SCLOCK and SDATA inputs suppresses noise spikes less than 50 ns.  
tBUF  
tSUP  
tR  
SDATA (I/O)  
MSB  
LSB  
ACK  
MSB  
tDSU  
tDSU  
tF  
tDHD  
tDHD  
tR  
tRSU  
tH  
tPSU  
SCLK (I)  
tSHD  
1
2-7  
8
9
1
tSUP  
tL  
S(R)  
PS  
tF  
STOP  
START  
REPEATED  
START  
CONDITION CONDITION  
Figure 74. I2C Compatible Interface Timing  
Rev. A | Page 98 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 68. SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CPHA = 1) Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
635  
635  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK Low Pulse Width1  
SCLOCK High Pulse Width1  
Data Output Valid after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Setup Time before SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Hold Time after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Output Fall Time  
Data Output Rise Time  
SCLOCK Rise Time  
SCLOCK Fall Time  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
50  
100  
100  
10  
10  
10  
10  
25  
25  
25  
25  
tSF  
ns  
____________________________________________  
1 Characterized under the following conditions:  
a. Core clock divider bits CD2, CD1, and CD0 in PLLCON SFR set to 0, 1, and 1, respectively, that is, core clock frequency = 1.57 MHz.  
b. SPI bit-rate selection bits SPR1 and SPR0 in SPICON SFR set to 0 and 0, respectively.  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
tDAV  
tDF  
tDR  
MOSI  
MISO  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
LSB IN  
MSB IN  
BITS 6–1  
tDSU  
tDHD  
Figure 75. SPI Master Mode Timing (CHPA = 1)  
Rev. A | Page 99 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 69. SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CPHA = 0) Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
635  
635  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK Low Pulse Width1  
SCLOCK High Pulse Width1  
tDAV  
tDOSU  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
tSF  
Data Output Valid after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Output Setup before SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Setup Time before SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Hold Time after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Output Fall Time  
Data Output Rise Time  
SCLOCK Rise Time  
SCLOCK Fall Time  
50  
150  
100  
100  
10  
10  
10  
10  
25  
25  
25  
25  
1 Characterized under the following conditions:  
a. Core clock divider bits CD2, CD1, and CD0 in PLLCON SFR set to 0, 1, and 1, respectively, that is, core clock frequency = 1.57 MHz.  
b. SPI bit-rate selection bits SPR1 and SPR0 in SPICON SFR set to 0 and 0, respectively.  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
tDAV  
tDOSU  
tDF  
tDR  
MOSI  
MISO  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
LSB IN  
MSB IN  
BITS 6–1  
tDSU tDHD  
Figure 76. SPI Master Mode Timing (CHPA = 0)  
Rev. A | Page 100 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 70. SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CPHA = 1) Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSS  
SS to SCLOCK Edge  
0
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK Low Pulse Width  
SCLOCK High Pulse Width  
Data Output Valid after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Setup Time before SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Hold Time after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Output Fall Time  
330  
330  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
50  
100  
100  
10  
10  
10  
10  
25  
25  
25  
25  
Data Output Rise Time  
SCLOCK Rise Time  
tSF  
SCLOCK Fall Time  
tSFS  
SS High after SCLOCK Edge  
0
SS  
tSFS  
tSS  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
tDAV  
tDF  
tDR  
MISO  
BITS 6–1  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
MSB  
MOSI  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
tDSU  
tDHD  
Figure 77. SPI Slave Mode Timing (CHPA = 1)  
Rev. A | Page 101 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 71. SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CPHA = 0) Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSS  
SS to SCLOCK Edge  
0
tSL  
tSH  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
SCLOCK Low Pulse Width  
SCLOCK High Pulse Width  
Data Output Valid after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Setup Time before SCLOCK Edge  
Data Input Hold Time after SCLOCK Edge  
Data Output Fall Time  
330  
330  
50  
100  
100  
10  
10  
10  
10  
25  
25  
25  
25  
20  
tDR  
Data Output Rise Time  
tSR  
SCLOCK Rise Time  
tSF  
SCLOCK Fall Time  
tDOSS  
tSFS  
Data Output Valid after SS Edge  
SS High after SCLOCK Edge  
SS  
tSFS  
tSS  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSF  
tSR  
SCLOCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
tDAV  
tDOSS  
tDF  
tDR  
MISO  
MOSI  
BITS 6–1  
MSB  
LSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB IN  
MSB IN  
tDSU  
tDHD  
Figure 78. SPI Slave Mode Timing (CHPA = 0)  
Rev. A | Page 102 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
Table 72. UART Timing (Shift Register Mode) Parameter  
12.58 MHz Core_Clk  
Variable Core_Clk  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
TXLXL  
Serial Port Clock Cycle Time  
Output Data Setup to Clock  
Input Data Setup to Clock  
Input Data Hold after Clock  
Output Data Hold after Clock  
954  
12tcore  
TQVXH  
TDVXH  
TXHDX  
TXHQX  
662  
292  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
22  
ns  
tXLXL  
TxD  
(OUTPUT CLOCK)  
SET RI  
OR  
tQVXH  
SET TI  
tXHQX  
RxD  
(OUTPUT DATA)  
LSB  
BIT 1  
BIT 6  
tDVXH  
tXHDX  
RxD  
(INPUT DATA)  
LSB  
BIT 1  
BIT 6  
MSB  
Figure 79. UART Timing in Shift Register Mode  
Rev. A | Page 103 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS  
14.15  
1.03  
0.88  
0.73  
13.90 SQ  
13.65  
2.45  
MAX  
39  
27  
SEATING  
PLANE  
40  
26  
10.20  
10.00 SQ  
9.80  
TOP VIEW  
(PINS DOWN)  
7.80  
REF  
10°  
6°  
2°  
2.10  
2.00  
1.95  
0.23  
0.11  
VIEW A  
PIN 1  
7°  
0°  
52  
14  
0.25  
MAX  
1
13  
0.13 MIN  
COPLANARITY  
0.65 BSC  
0.38  
0.22  
VIEW A  
ROTATED 90° CCW  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-112-AC-1  
Figure 80. 52-Lead Metric Quad Flat Package [MQFP]  
(S-52)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
0.30  
0.23  
0.18  
8.00  
BSC SQ  
0.60 MAX  
0.60 MAX  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
43  
42  
56  
1
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
6.25  
6.10  
5.95  
7.75  
BSC SQ  
BOTTOM  
VIEW  
SQ  
TOP  
VIEW  
0.50  
0.40  
0.30  
29  
28  
14  
15  
0.25 MIN  
6.50  
REF  
0.80 MAX  
0.65 TYP  
1.00  
0.85  
0.80  
12° MAX  
0.05 MAX  
0.02 NOM  
COPLANARITY  
0.08  
0.50 BSC  
0.20 REF  
SEATING  
PLANE  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-VLLD-2  
Figure 81. 56-Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP]  
(CP-56)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
Rev. A | Page 104 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
ORDERING GUIDE  
Model1  
Temperature Range  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
Package Description  
Package Option  
ADuC845BS62-5  
ADuC845BS62-3  
ADuC845BS8-5  
ADuC845BS8-3  
ADuC845BCP62-5  
ADuC845BCP62-3  
ADuC845BCP8-5  
ADuC845BCP8-3  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
ADuC847BS62-5  
ADuC847BS62-3  
ADuC847BS32-5  
ADuC847BS32-3  
ADuC847BS8-5  
ADuC847BS8-3  
ADuC847BCP62-5  
ADuC847BCP62-3  
ADuC847BCP8-5  
ADuC847BCP8-3  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 32-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 32-kbyte, 3 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
ADuC848BS62-5  
ADuC848BS62-3  
ADuC848BS32-5  
ADuC848BS32-3  
ADuC848BS8-5  
ADuC848BS8-3  
ADuC848BCP62-5  
ADuC848BCP62-3  
ADuC848BCP8-5  
ADuC848BCP8-3  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +125°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 32-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 32-kbyte, 3 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
52-Lead Plastic Quad Flatpack, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 62-kbyte, 3 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 5 V  
56-Lead Chip Scale Package, 8-kbyte, 3 V  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
S-52  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
CP-56  
EVAL-ADuC845QS  
EVAL-ADuC845QSP2  
EVAL-ADuC847QS  
EVAL-ADuC847QSP2  
QuickStart Development System  
QuickStart-PLUS Development System  
QuickStart Development System  
QuickStart-PLUS Development System  
1The -3 and -5 in the Model column indicate the DVDD operating voltage.  
2The QuickStart Plus system can only be ordered directly from Accutron. It can be purchased from the website www.accutron.com.  
Rev. A | Page 105 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
NOTES  
Rev. A | Page 106 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
NOTES  
Rev. A | Page 107 of 108  
ADuC845/ADuC847/ADuC848  
NOTES  
Purchase of licensed I2C components of Analog Devices or one of its sublicensed Associated Companies conveys a license for the purchaser under the Philips I2C Patent  
Rights to use these components in an I2C system, provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.  
©
2004 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
D04741–0–6/04(A)  
Rev. A | Page 108 of 108  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
VISHAY